first bank new facility · 2018. 5. 29. · 1. section 312000 "earth moving" for drainage...

FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY

PROJECT MANUAL

VOLUME II

MAY 8, 2018

First Bank Project No. A17012

Hattiesburg, MS May 08, 2018

DOCUMENT 000001 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division Section Title

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

A201-2007 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

000101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE

000115 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

003119 EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION

003132 GEOTECHNICAL DATA

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY

012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

012500 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

014200 REFERENCES

015000 TEMP FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

017300 EXECUTION

017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENENACE DATA

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

NOT USED

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

034500 PRECAST ARTHITECTURAL CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

042000 UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 – METALS

051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

053100 STEEL DECKING

054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

055000 METAL FABRICATIONS

055113 METAL PAN STAIRS

055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

057313 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

066100 SHEATHING

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071326 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

071700 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING

071900 WATER REPELLENTS

072100 THERMAL INSULATION

072419 WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)

074245 FIBER CEMENT WALL PANELS

075323 ETHLYENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES

077200 ROOF HATCH

079200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

081116 ALUMINUM THERMAL FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES

081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

083313 COILING COUNTER DOORS

084113 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT AND ENTRANCES

084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL

087100 DOOR HARDWARE

088000 GLAZING

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

092113 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD

093000 TILING

095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

095126 WOOD PANEL CEILINGS

096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

096525 LUXURY VINYL TILE

096813 TILE CARPETING

099123 PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

102113 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

102226 OPERABLE PARTITION

102800 TOILET, BATH & LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

104116 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

105300 PRE-FAB METAL CANOPIES

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

NOT USED

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT USED

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

142400 HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

221113 PLUMBING

221113.1 FIRE PROTECTION

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

233713 MECHANICAL

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

262416 PANELBOARDS

262726 WIRING DEVICES

262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING

265900 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

311000 SITE CLEARING

312000 EARTH MOVING

313116 TERMITE CONTROL

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321216 ASPHALT PAVING

321313 CONCRETE PAVING

321373 PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

321723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

321726 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

329113 SOIL PREPARATION

329200 TURF AND GRASSES

341713 VEHICLE BARRIERS

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

330500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 033000 - 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1. Footings. 2. Grade beams 3. Foundation walls. 4. Slabs-on-grade (ground). 5. Suspended slabs. 6. Building frame members. 7. Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA).

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

C. Coordination: Unless other satisfactory agreements are specifically entered into by contractors concerned, all miscellaneous iron and steel, sleeves, anchors, etc., required by work of other contractors, will be furnished and installed by such other contractors with the cooperation of this contractor.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 2. Laboratory test reports for concrete mix design with the following data:

a. Method used to determine the proposed mix design (per ACI 301, Article 4.2.3). b. Gradation and quantity of fine and coarse aggregates. c. Proportions of all ingredients including all admixtures added either at the time of

batching or at the job site. d. Water/cement ratio and water/cementitious ratio. e. Slump - ASTM C143. f. Certification and test results of the total water-soluble chloride ion content of the

design mix - FHWA RD-77 or AASHTO T 260-84. g. Air content of freshly mixed concrete by the pressure method, ASTM C231, or the

volumetric method, ASTM C173. h. Unit weight of concrete - ASTM C138. i. Strength at 7 and 28 days - ASTM C39, and 3-day strength for post-tensioned

concrete. Document strength on basis of previous field experience or trial mixtures per ACI 301 Article 4.2.3. Submit strength test records, mix design materials, conditions, and proportions for concrete used for record of tests, standard calculation, and determination of required average compressive strength.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

E. Samples: For waterstops and vapor retarder.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, and testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Semirigid joint filler. 13. Joint-filler strips. 14. Repair materials.

D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

E. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.

F. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

G. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for formwork and shoring and reshoring installations that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.

E. Special Inspector Qualifications: A qualified person employed or retained by an approved agency that has the recommended experience and certifications as summarized in Appendix C of the current International Code Council (ICC) Special Inspection Manual.

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA):

1. MVRA must be installed according to, and in compliance with, the manufacturer's published data sheet to include, but not limited to: a. Dosing instructions. b. Onsite representation requirements. c. Use of an ASTM E 1745 vapor retarder installed following ASTM E 1643 and

ASTM F710 guidelines; slabs on deck do not require a vapor retarder. 2. Manufacturer's Warranty: To include:

a. Term: Life of the concrete. b. Repair and/or removal of failed flooring or roofing. c. Placement of a topical moisture remediation system. d. Replacement of flooring/roofing materials like original installed to include

material and labor. 3. Adhesion Warranty: MVRA Manufacturer shall provide an adhesion warranty to match

the term of the adhesive and/or primer manufacturer's material defect warranty upon MVRA manufacturer's acceptance of field bond test.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 2. ACI 117 (ACI 117M). 3. ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

F. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

G. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

H. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive damp proofing or waterproofing.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed bars, ASTM A 934/A 934M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) bar length.

C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, galvanized.

D. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M.

E. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, Type 1 coated, as-drawn, plain-steel wire, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) wire length.

F. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

G. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet.

H. Galvanized-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.

I. Epoxy-Coated Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, Type 1, plain steel.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

3. For slabs on ground, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 4S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal for foundations, 3/4-inch (19 mm) for all other concrete.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

F. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. BASF Corp. - Construction Chemicals; MasterLife CI 30 (Pre-2014: Rheocrete CNI).

b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; EUCON BCN. c. GCP Applied Technologies Inc. (formerly Grace Construction Products); DCI. d. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI.

G. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set-accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.


a. BASF Corp. - Construction Chemicals; MasterLife CI 222 (Pre-2014: Rheocrete 222+).

b. GCP Applied Technologies Inc. (formerly Grace Construction Products); DCI-S. c. Sika Corporation; FerroGard 901.

H. Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Barrier One Incorporated; High Performance Concrete Admixture or comparable product. a. Subject to compliance with requirements, substitutions may be considered. Failure

to provide a product that meets or exceeds the MVRA warranty requirements of Part I and the MVRA field quality control requirements of Part 3 will result in all subsequent testing and slab remediation costs being borne by the ready mix supplier.

2. Description: Concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture shall be non-toxic, liquid admixture, specifically designed to have a natural chemical reaction with pre-existing elements inside the concrete to eliminate the route of moisture vapor emission through the slab by restricting the integral capillary system. Chemical reaction shall form a permanent barrier (capillary break) that is integral to the concrete, insoluble, and irremovable.

3. Application: Provide MVRA concrete for all interior slab-on-grade, elevated slab-on-deck, and elevated formed slabs

I. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch (19 by 25 mm).

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. CETCO, a Minerals Technologies company; Waterstop-RX-101. b. Sika Greenstreak; Swellstop.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A 15 mils. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.


a. Raven Industries, Inc; Vapor Block 15. b. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-Mil). c. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Perminator 15 mil.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.


a. BASF Corp. - Construction Chemicals; Confilm. b. ChemMasters, Inc; Spray-Film. c. Dayton Superior; AquaFilm Concentrate J74. d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Eucobar. e. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm. f. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. g. W.R. Meadows, Inc; EVAPRE.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ChemMasters, Inc; Safe-Cure Clear DR. b. Dayton Superior; Clear Resin Cure J11W. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Kurez DR VOX.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

d. W.R. Meadows, Inc; 1100-CLEAR SERIES.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, aromatic polyurea with a Type A shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95 according to ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Slag Cement: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 50 percent portland cement minimum,

with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing high-range or water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch.

B. Walls, Columns and Interior Structural Frame: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd. 3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches and (8 inches) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches

before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture plus or minus 1 inch.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Exterior and other concrete exposed to weather: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5000 psi, air-entrained. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 610 lb/cu. yd. 3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40. 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches and (8 inches) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches


5. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

6. Air Content: 6 percent, plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm)] nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Interior Slabs-on-Grade and Slabs-on-Metal Deck: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd. 3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.42. 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches and (8 inches) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches


5. For Floor Slabs Only, Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA): For mix designs ranging from 0.42 to 0.52 w/cm, dose at 14 ounces per 100 pounds of total cementitious materials. Remove an equal amount of water from the mix. Add separately from other admixtures at the tail end of the load. Mix designs below 0.42 and above 0.52 may require adjustment.

2.13 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Earth cuts may be used as forms for footing vertical surfaces, if sides are sharp and true, and not exposed in finished structure.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

D. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

E. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

F. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

1. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable.

N. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

2. No aluminum conduit shall be installed in concrete. 3. No sleeves, holes, or inserts shall be placed in or within 2'-0" of columns or beams

without approval of the structural engineer.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

B. Granular Course: For slabs on ground receiving moisture-sensitive floor covering place slab directly on vapor retarder. Place vapor retarder on granular fill or fine-graded granular material, moisten and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm).

1. Place and compact a 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick layer of fine-graded granular material over granular fill.

C. Thickness of granular fill (including fine-graded) shall be 4” (100 mm) minimum unless noted otherwise in geotechnical report.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.

G. Where reinforcement is in top (top 3") of all concrete exposed to freeze-thaw conditions, use epoxy-coated.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls at 30’-0” spacing. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints at a maximum spacing in feet of 3 times the slab thickness in inches in each direction and located to conform to bay spacing whenever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays). Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

3.8 WATERSTOP INSTALLATION

A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. No concrete shall be placed except when Architect's representative (or independent testing laboratory) is present unless this requirement is specifically waived by the Architect. Give adequate notice to the Architect, the testing laboratory, and all contractors affected before placing concrete.

C. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified. Concrete delivery tickets shall show:

1. Batch number 2. Mix by number with cement content in pounds and maximum size aggregate 3. Admixtures 4. Air content 5. Slump 6. Time of loading.

D. Discharge concrete within 1-1/2 hours after water has been added to the cement, unless a longer time has been authorized by the Architect/Engineer. During hot weather or other conditions contributing to a quick stiffening of the concrete, the Architect/Engineer may require discharge in less than 1-1/2 hours. If loss of slump occurs, HRWR may be redosed at the site as long as a "flash set" has not occurred. Redosage procedures must be discussed and approved by the Engineer and the manufacturer at the Pre-Concrete Conference.

E. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

F. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

G. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

H. Place interior slabs on grade that will later receive floor coverings only after floor level or roof above has been placed. Also, protect the slab from any moisture infiltration until building is complete.

I. Pumping Concrete: Grout used to prime a pump shall not be placed in the forms in any concrete exposed to view in the final structure.

3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with

minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.

b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs.

3. F(L) levelness tolerances shall not apply to cambered or inclined surfaces.

4. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm).

C. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches (100 mm) high unless otherwise indicated, and extend

base not less than 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.

3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete substrate.

6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.

3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

d. Use moisture-retaining covers to cure all MVRA concrete.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.14 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENT APPLICATION

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs.

2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 28 days' old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet;

and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4 inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections and field quality control testing: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Refer to drawings for testing and special inspection requirements.

2. Prepare and submit reports within 7 days of completing tests and inspections. Distribute reports to Architect, Engineer, Owner (or owner’s representative), and Contractor. Clearly indicate non-compliance on reports.

B. Testing of Slabs Containing MVRA:

1. The moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA) manufacturer will perform all moisture testing in accordance with this specification and will issue project specific warranties prior to installation of any slab finishes; no further field slab moisture nor pH testing shall be required. a. Failure to provide a product that meets or exceeds these requirements will result in

all subsequent testing and slab remediation costs being borne by the contractor. 2. A representative or agent of the moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA)

manufacturer must be present at the jobsite during placement of all MVRA treated concrete. Do not proceed without this representative being present.

3. Field testing technician shall, at the expense of the MVRA Manufacturer, procure at least one 4 inch (102 mm) cylinder from every day of placement of MVRA dosed concrete for the purpose of subsequent hydraulic conductivity/coefficient of permeability testing.

4. All cylinders shall be independently lab tested in accordance with ASTM D 5084 at the expense of the MVRA manufacturer.

5. Test results must conform to specified limits. a. Should any cylinder from any day of placement deliver results in excess of 6.0 E-

08 cm/sec, the concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture manufacturer shall procure, at their expense, a core (or cores) from that day of placement. This core (cores) shall be sent to an independent laboratory for hydraulic conductivity (coefficient or permeability) per ASTM D 5084.

b. Should any core deliver results in excess of 6.0 E-08 cm/sec per ASTM D 5084, the concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture manufacturer shall provide, at their expense, a topical moisture mitigation system for all areas not meeting the stated limit.

6. Proceeding with placement of concrete dosed with the MVRA without the required representation will result in the contractor bearing the cost to core and ship appropriate material for testing per ASTM D 5084.

C. Non-Compliant Work:

1. The contractor shall remove and replace all non-compliant work, or, at the contractor’s expense, perform additional testing to verify compliance. Contractor shall submit results of additional testing to Architect, Engineer, and Owner (or owner’s representative) for review and approval.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.17 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.

END OF SECTION 033000


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Mix Design Submittal Form

A copy of this form shall be completed for each type of concrete listed in the specification. Mix designs not submitted on this form will not be reviewed.

Part 1

CONCRETE SUPPLIER INFORMATION

Contact Person:

Telephone Number:

Company Name:

Address:

Main Plant Location:

Miles from Project Site:

PROJECT INFORMATION

Project Name:

Address:

General Contractor:

Concrete Type:

Specification Section Reference:

Intended Use:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Part 2

DETERMINE REQUIRED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (select one method)

□ If field test data is available:

If a group of at least 15 consecutive compressive strength tests meeting the requirements of ACI 5.3.1 are available, calculate the standard deviation and required average compressive strength from ACI Table 5.3.2.1

□ If field test data is not available:

If no field compressive strength tests are available, select required average compressive strength from ACI Table 5.3.2.2

Recorded Field Test Data Test Date f'c

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Number of Tests:

Standard Deviation:

K Factor:

f'cr:

f'cr:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Part 3

DOCUMENTATION OF AVGERAGE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

Two methods of determining expected compressive strength are acceptable including Field Test Data Method and Trial Mix Method. Select one method and provide the data required as described.

Field Test Data Method:

Provide design Materials, Types, Specific Gravity, Weight and Volume for the concrete being tested. Uti-lize the following table. Mix #2 is not required when ten or more consecutive strength tests for one mix-ture are available. See ACI 5.3.3 for additional information and requirements.

Materials Type/Source Specific Gravity

Weight (lbs.)

Absolute Volume (Cu. Ft.)

Mix #1 #2 #1 #2 #1 #2 #1 #2

Cement

Fly Ash

Microsilica

Coarse Aggregate

Fine Aggregate

Water

Air

Other

TOTAL 27.0 cu. ft.

Mix #1, Water/Cement Ratio:



Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

□ If at least 10 strength tests represent one mixture, calculate average compressive strength and verify it is greater than re-quired compressive strength.

□ If at least 10 strength tests represent two mixtures, calculate average compressive strength for each mixture and plot as a function of water/cement ratio. Using the required compressive strength from Part 2, determine the corresponding wa-ter/cement ratio.

Attach copy of average compressive strength vs. water cement ratio.

Establish mixture proportions based upon the required water cementitious ratio. Use the table below to show the actual mixture used on the project. (If one trial mix was used the mixture will match Mix #1)

Field Test Data Mix #1 Date f'c Mix #2* Date f'c

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9

10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30

Average - Average -

Average Compres-sive Strength (f’c):

Required Compres-sive Strength (f’cr):

Required Compres-sive Strength (f’c):

Water/Cement Ra-tio From Plot:


Weight (lbs.)


Cement Fly Ash

Microsilica Coarse Aggregate

Fine Aggregate Water

Air Other

TOTAL 27.0 cu. ft.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Trial Mixture Method:

Provide three design mixtures including: Materials, Types, Specific Gravity, Weight and Volume for the concrete being tested. See ACI 4.2.3.4.b for additional information and requirements.


Weight (lbs.)


Trial Mixture #1 #2 #3 #1 #2 #3 #1 #2 #3 #1 #2 #3 Cement Fly Ash

Microsilica Coarse Aggregate Fine Aggregate

Water Air

Other

Total 27.0 cu. ft.

Provide compressive test results from above mixtures.

Plot average compressive strength versus water cement ratio and determine the proper water-cementitious material ratio to meet the required compressive strength from Part 2.




Trial Mix Test Data Mix #1 Date f'c Mix #2 Date f'c Mix #3 Date f'c

1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3

Average - Average - Average -

Required Compressive Strength (f’cr):

Water/Cementitious Materials Ratio:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Establish the mixture proportions based upon the required water cementitious ratio. Use the table below to summarize mixture proportions used on the project.

Additional Requirements/Information:

Please provide the following attachments: (Initial if attached)

Coarse Aggregate Gradation Report

Fine Aggregate Gradation Report

Concrete Compressive Strength Data

Admixture Compatibility Certification Letter

Trial Mixture strength vs. water/cement ratio plots


Weight (lbs.)


Cement Fly Ash

Microsilica Coarse Aggregate

Fine Aggregate Water

Air Other

TOTAL 27.0 cu. ft.

Section 034500 - 1 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 034500

PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes architectural precast concrete cladding units.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved architectural precast concrete color, finish and texture, preapproved by Architect.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water-absorption tests.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units. 2. Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit. 3. Indicate joints, reveals, drips, chamfers, and extent and location of each surface finish. 4. Indicate details at building corners.

D. Samples: Design reference samples for initial verification of design intent, for each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of three, representative of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm).

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For architectural precast concrete indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


A. Welding certificates.

B. Material certificates.

C. Material Test Reports: For aggregates.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Designated as a PCI-certified plant for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units at time of bidding or designated as an APA-certified plant for production of architectural precast concrete products.

B. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products."

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

D. Sample Panels: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units, produce a minimum of two sample panels approximately 16 sq. ft. (1.5 sq. m) in area for review by Architect. Incorporate full-scale details of architectural features, finishes, textures, and transitions in sample panels.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design architectural precast concrete units.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated.

C. Calculated Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide architectural precast concrete units with fire-resistance rating indicated as calculated according to PCI MNL 124, "Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete," and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated.

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

E. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 117.

2.3 PRESTRESSING TENDONS

A. Prestressing Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 270 (Grade 1860), uncoated, seven-wire, low-relaxation strand.

1. Coat unbonded post-tensioning strand with post-tensioning coating complying with ACI 423.7 and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing complying with ACI 423.7. Include anchorage devices and coupler assemblies.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use gray or white cement, of same type, brand, and mill source.

B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials:

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent. 2. Metakaolin: ASTM C 618, Class N. 3. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement. 4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

5. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type (as per manuractures standards) cement.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33/C 33M, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.

1. Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.

a. Gradation: To match design reference sample.

2. Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand compatible with coarse aggregate; to match approved finish sample.

D. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.

E. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117.

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures.

G. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture.

2.5 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished, AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or Type B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.

C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C.

D. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 or Grade 35028.

E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30 (Grade 415-205).

F. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M.

G. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B or Grade C.

H. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65 (Grade 450).

I. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496/A 496M or ASTM A 706/A 706M.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

J. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A or ASTM F 1554, Grade 36(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844.

K. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and hardened carbon-steel washers, ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M).

L. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items and items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.

1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B or SSPC-Paint 20.

M. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized steel items, except those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3 and shop-apply lead- and chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79 according to SSPC-PA 1.

2.6 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 to 3 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time. Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M, of type, grade, and class to suit requirements.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

B. Limit use of fly ash and ground granulated blast-furnace slag to 20 percent of portland cement by weight; limit metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

C. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

E. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) minimum.

F. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to ASTM C 642, except for boiling requirement.

G. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117.

H. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement.

1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."

B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction.

C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

D. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

E. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses and specified in-place loads.

F. Prestress tendons for architectural precast concrete units by either pretensioning or post-tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 117.

G. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

H. Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch (25 mm)or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover specified.

I. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent cold joints or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units.

1. Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.

J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air voids on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.

1. Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants." Ensure adequate bond between face and backup concrete, if used.

K. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.

L. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that does not show in finished structure.

M. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product.

N. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval.

2.9 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Exposed faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including false joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match approved design reference sample and as follows:

1. Design Reference Sample: As selected by Architect from manufactures full range of industry finishes.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. PCI's "Architectural Precast Concrete - Color and Texture Selection Guide," of plate numbers indicated.

3. As-Cast Surface Finish: Provide surfaces to match approved sample for acceptable surface, air voids, sand streaks, and honeycomb.

4. Textured-Surface Finish: Impart by form liners or inserts. 5. Bushhammer Finish: Use power or hand tools to remove matrix and fracture coarse

aggregates. 6. Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Use chemical retarding agents applied to concrete forms and

washing and brushing procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces after form removal.

7. Abrasive-Blast Finish: Use abrasive grit, equipment, application techniques, and cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces.

8. Acid-Etched Finish: Use acid and hot-water solution, equipment, application techniques, and cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces. Protect hardware, connections, and insulation from acid attach.

9. Honed Finish: Use continuous mechanical abrasion with fine grit, followed by filling and rubbing procedures.

10. Polished Finish: Use continuous mechanical abrasion with fine grit, followed by filling and rubbing procedures.

11. Sand-Embedment Finish: Use selected stones placed in a sand bed in bottom of mold, with sand removed after curing.

B. Finish exposed top surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match face-surface finish.

C. Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units with as cast finish.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117 requirements. If using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TR-6, ASTM C 1610/C 1610M, ASTM C 1611/C 1611M, ASTM C 1621/C 1621M, and ASTM C 1712.

B. Owner will employ an independent testing agency to evaluate architectural precast concrete fabricator's quality-control and testing methods.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.

B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of units until permanent connections are completed.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch (19 mm).

C. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.

D. Welding: Comply with applicable requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4/D1.4M for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment.

F. Grouting or Dry-Packing Connections and Joints: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain flowable grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Alternatively, pack spaces with stiff dry-pack grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout and finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set.

3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Visually inspect field welds and test according to ASTM E 165 or to ASTM E 709 and ASTM E 1444. High-strength bolted connections are subject to inspections.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. Architect reserves the right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet (6 m).

C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M.

D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop primer.

E. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply with requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.

B. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.

C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.

1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.

2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.


Section 042000 - 1 UNIT MASONRY

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 042000

UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Clay face brick. 4. Mortar and grout. 5. Steel reinforcing bars. 6. Masonry-joint reinforcement. 7. Ties and anchors. 8. Embedded flashing. 9. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section:

1. Steel lintels in unit masonry. 2. Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry. 3. Cavity wall insulation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

1.4 ENGINEERING OF MASONRY SYSTEM

A. The drawings (plans and design details) and specifications are an outline of the criteria and performance requirements of the work. The requirements shown by the details are intended to establish basic dimensions of the module and the site lines and profiles of members. Within these parameters, the Contractor is responsible for the design and engineering of the masonry system, including whatever modifications or additions may be required to meet the specified requirements and maintain the visual design concept for the entire work of this Section.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018





B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing

bars. Comply with ACI 315. 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail end-dam units and other special applications.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Colored mortar. 2. Weep holes/cavity vents.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Clay face Hollow brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on

Project. 3. Weep holes/cavity vents. 4. Accessories embedded in masonry.


A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Provide structural calculations, prepared by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State where the building will be constructed, prepared in compliance with referenced documents and these specifications. Where specifications and code differ, the more stringent requirement shall govern. Calculations shall be legible and shall incorporate sufficient cross references to shop drawings to make the calculations readily understandable and reviewable. Calculations shall include the following information:

1. Analysis for all applicable loads on anchors.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls

within specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.

2. Integral water repellant used in CMUs. 3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. 4. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 6. Reinforcing bars. 7. Joint reinforcement. 8. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

F. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

G. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 15’-6” inches long by 10’-2” inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.

a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 incheslong in exterior wall mockup. b. Include lower corner of window opening at upper corner of exterior wall mockup.

Make opening approximately 12 inches wide by 16 incheshigh.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inchlength in corner of exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing).

d. Include concrete masonry back-up, vapor retarder, insulation, veneer anchors, flashing, cavity drainage material, and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup.

2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 4. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of

mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship.

a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.

b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 36 inchesdown both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 36 inchesdown face next to unconstructed wythe, and hold cover in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.


A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

a. Minimum average net area compressive strength shall be 2000 psi.

2.3 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi.

2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inchless than nominal dimensions.

C. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C90.

1. Provide materials by York Building Products or an equal product approved by the Architect.

2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of [2150 psi] [2800 psi] [3050 psi] <Insert value>.

Density classification in "Density Classification" Subparagraph below affects appearance and water absorption. Verify availability of lightweight decorative CMUs before specifying.

3. Density Classification: Normal weight. 4. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions specified in "CMUs" Paragraph. 5. Pattern and Texture:

a. Standard pattern, ground-face finish. Refer to the Exterior Materials Chart on the Drawings.

6. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.5 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

B. Clay Face Brick: hollow brick complying with ASTM C 652, Class H40V (void areas between 25 and 40 percent of gross cross-sectional area).

1. Products: Provide the following materials or equal materials meeting performance requirements and meeting Architect’s aesthetic intent/brick color. Architect and Owner shall be sole decision makers on aesthetic design:

a. Field Brick; RI Lampus, Garrison Gray .

1) Size (Actual Dimensions) 3 5/8” x 3 5/8” x 7 5/8”. 2) Mortar: As selected by the Architect

b. Accent Brick; RI Lampus, As selected by the Architect

1) Size (Actual Dimensions) 3 5/8” x 3 5/8” x 7 5/8”. 2) Mortar: As selected by the Architect

2. Grade: SW. 3. Type: HBS. 4. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in.per minute when tested according to

ASTM C 67. 5. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated

"not effloresced."

C. Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C 62, Grade SW.

1. Size: Match size of face brick. 2. Application: Use where brick is indicated for concealed locations. Face brick complying

with requirements for grade, compressive strength, and size indicated for building brick may be substituted for building brick.

2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime shall be manufactured within 500 milesof Project site.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

H. Water: Potable.

2.7 REINFORCEMENT/TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Refer to Articles 1.4 and 1.6 for engineering requirements.

B. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inchdiameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inchdiameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 incheso.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.

D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating.

2. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

3. Adjustable (two-piece) type, ladder design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch and maximum vertical adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inchcover on outside face.

a. Product: Provide Lox-All adjustable reinforcement, Model 270-Ladder Lox-All Adjustable Eye-Wire, Extra Heavy.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Stainless steel core flexible flashing with drainage fabric:

1. Product standard of quality: York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Flash-Vent SS,

2. Accepted products: a. York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Flash-Vent SS, (www.yorkmfg.com) b. STS Coatings, Inc.; Wall Guardian Venting Stainless Steel TWF

(www.stscoatings.com) c. Building Materials West Company, Inc.; Evacu-Flash SS (www.evacu-flash.com) d. Other flashings that meet the requirements of this specification.

3. Characteristics: a. Type: Engineered system, with high resistant to damage, composite with a

stainless steel with non-asphalt adhesive polymer fabric laminated to one stainless steel and non-woven drainage fabric laminated to opposing face with non-asphalt adhesive.

b. Stainless steel: type 304, ASTM A240. Domestically sourced per DFARS 252.225-7008 and/or DFARS 252.225-7009.

c. Fabrics:

4. Polymer fabric; laminated back face to stainless steel core

5. Non-woven drainage fabric: Fabric laminated to front face stainless steel core. a. Recycled content: stainless steel is 60% recycled b. Size: Manufacturer's standard width rolls.

B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

C. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Stainless-steel sheet 0.019 inch by 1-1/2 inches with a 3/8 inch sealant flange at top.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc. 2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mortar Net

Solutions; Mortar Net with Insect Barrier or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Advanced Building Products Inc. b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. c. Wire-Bond.

2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

4. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:

a. Clay face brick.

E. Grout for Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 476.

1. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476 paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3,000 psi.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum for walls in excess of 20 feet.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum for walls in excess of 20 feet.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inchmaximum for walls in excess of 20 feet.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum for walls in excess of 20 feet.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet or 1/2-inch maximum for walls in excess of 20 feet.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.

5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

6. At masonry walls receiving waterproofing or vapor retarders strike joints flush or prepare joints in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inchhorizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inchhorizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inchesunder bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

2. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping."

3.5 CAVITY WALLS

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together as follows:

1. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use tab-type reinforcement. b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type)

reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

c. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) reinforcement to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align.

2. Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.

B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.

C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

3.6 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. 2. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and

down. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c.

horizontally, with not less than one anchor for each 2 sq. ft.of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inchesof openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter.

B. Provide not less than dimensions indicated on drawings of airspace between back of masonry veneer and face of insulation.

1. Keep airspace clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from airspace, to minimize mortar protrusions into airspace. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into airspace.

3.7 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inchon exterior side of walls, 1/2 inchelsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 incheso.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 incheso.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inchesabove and below wall openings and

extending 12 inchesbeyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

D. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.

C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Provide vertical expansion joints at consistent intervals not exceeding 20 feet. Place expansion joints at equal distances from corners with combined distance not exceeding 10 feet.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8

inchfor installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079005 "Joint Sealants."

3.9 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install cavity vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 16 inches, and mechanically secure to termination bar.

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inchesinto masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inchesat ends and turn up not less than 2 inchesto form end dams.

4. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inchback from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing.

1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 incheso.c. unless otherwise indicated.

E. Place cavity drainage material in airspace behind veneers to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

F. Install cavity vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form cavity vents.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level C in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft.of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength.

F. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Protect window framing and glass prior to start of masonry cleaning. 3. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 04 20 00

Section 051200 - 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel. 2. Field-installed shear connectors. 3. Grout. 4. Other Steel: shelf angles, relieving angles, loose lintels, beam lintels.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel.

2. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel

items not defined as structural steel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" except as modified in this section.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, Fabricator, and testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

D. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Professional Engineer Qualificatons: A Professional Engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where the project is located and who is experienced in providing


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for projects with structural steel framing that are similar to that indicated for this project in material, design, and extent.

E. Special Inspector Qualifications: A qualified person employed or retained by an approved agency that has the recommended experience and certifications as summarized in Appendix C of the current International Code Council (ICC) Special Inspection Manual.

F. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service-load level. 3. Unless noted otherwise on design drawings, design and provide stiffeners, doubler plates,

etc., in connections where needed.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural-steel connections.

C. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.

D. Construction: Combined system of moment frame and shear walls.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M or ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345)

B. Channels, Angles, Plates & Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M

C. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

1. Weight Class: Standard except where otherwise indicated. 2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 (ASTM F 959M, Type 10.9), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

E. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A496 and AWS D1.1, from cold-rolled steel with a minimum yield strength of 70 ksi (485 MPa) and tensile strength of 80 ksi (550 MPa).

F. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Configuration: Hooked. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain, unless indicated to be hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class C.

G. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain, unless indicated to be hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class C.

H. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain, unless indicated to be hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class C.

I. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.

2.4 PRIMER

A. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

D. Primer: SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer.

E. Interior Steel Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

F. Exterior Steel Primer: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I, Level 1 zinc rich coating.

G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.5 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations. 6. Furnish main steel members in one piece without splicing, unless otherwise noted on

project drawings, or approved by Structural Engineer.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill,or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Deformed Bar Anchors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of deformed bar anchors. Use stud welding gun in accordance with AWS D1.1 and manufacturer’s written instructions.

G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

H. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide expansion joints in steel shelf angles when part of structural steel frame; locate at vertical masonry expansion joints as indicated on drawings. The


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

gap between ends of angles shall equal the width of the masonry expansion joint. The angles shall have support within 8” of the joints. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.

2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Pretensioned.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

C. Design of Connections: Typical AISC connections are to be used except where otherwise shown. Details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. Promptly notify Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of structure are not clearly indicated.

D. Fabricate length of diagonal bracing to provide nominal tension in member when erected.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. For interior steel not exposed to view: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. For exterior steel, interior steel exposed to view, and AESS: SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2,

"Near-White Blast Cleaning." 4. For steel to be hot-dipped galvanized: SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

2.9 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2. All shelf angles, relieving angles, and lintels extending into cavities of exterior cavity walls and/or extending into exterior wythes of exterior masonry walls are to be hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. .

B. All welded assemblies to be galvanized shall be prepared according to Recommended Practice for Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Products (ASTM A385).


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten or Pretension anchor rods after supported members have been positioned

and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Do not install shear studs on top flanges of beams until steel deck is installed. Shear studs will be installed on top flanges of beams by the steel deck installer.

I. Deformed bar anchors shall be welded in accordance with AWS D1.1. Anchors shall be installed prior to concrete placement, to fully embed anchors. Anchors not installed in shop are subject to additional testing as deemed required by the Engineer.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, Pretensioned, or Slip critical.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.


A. Special Inspections and field quality control testing: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


B. Non-Compliant Work:


3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.


Section 053100 - 1 STEEL DECKING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck. 2. Composite floor deck. 3. Noncomposite form deck.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight and lightweight structural concrete fill over steel deck.

2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors. 3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel

shapes.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:

1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners. 2. Acoustical roof deck.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck, from ICC-ES.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Special Inspector Qualifications: A qualified person employed or retained by an approved agency that has the recommended experience and certifications as summarized in Appendix C of the current International Code Council (ICC) Special Inspection Manual.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

D. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. ASC Profiles, Inc. 2. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc. 3. DACS, Inc. 4. Epic Metals Corporation. 5. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. 6. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 7. Nucor Corp.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

8. Roof Deck, Inc. 9. United Steel Deck, Inc. 10. Valley Joist. 11. Verco Decking, Inc., a Nucor company.

B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI RD 1.0-2006 Standard for Steel Roof Deck", and with the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), G60 (Z180) zinc coating.

2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 5. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 6. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.

2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK


1. ASC Profiles, Inc. 2. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc. 3. DACS, Inc. 4. Epic Metals Corporation. 5. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. 6. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 7. Nucor Corp. 8. Roof Deck, Inc. 9. United Steel Deck, Inc. 10. Verco Decking, Inc., a Nucor company.

B. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI C 1.0-2006 Standard for Composite Steel Deck", with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40 (275),

G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 4. Span Condition: Triple span or more.

2.4 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK


1. ASC Profiles, Inc. 2. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3. DACS, Inc. 4. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. 5. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 6. Nucor Corp. 7. Roof Deck, Inc. 8. United Steel Deck, Inc. 9. Valley Joist. 10. Verco Decking, Inc., a Nucor company.

B. Noncomposite Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form-deck panels to comply with "SDI NC 1.0-2006 Standard for Non-Composite Steel Deck", with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 60 (415), G60 (Z180) zinc coating.

2. Profile Depth, Thickness, Span and Configuration: Provide deck of depth, thickness, and configuration to support the dead load of the concrete plus 25 pounds per square foot construction loads while sustaining only a maximum of L/240 deflection when placed over number of spans used.

3. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI C or NC standards for overhang and slab depth.

G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

H. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

I. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck, with 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide flanges and sloped recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field.

J. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M, SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.

K. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI R 1.0, SDI C 1.0, and SDI NC 1.0, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds

per deck unit at each support. Space welds 12 inches (305 mm) apart in the field of roof and 6 inches (150 mm) apart in roof corners and perimeter, based on roof-area definitions in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 or as indicated on drawings.

3. Weld Washers: For decks with thickness less than 0.028 inch (0.71 mm), install weld washers at each weld location.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 18 inches (457 mm), and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum or butted at Contractor's option.

D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least one weld fastener at each corner.

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld.

E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.

F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.

3.4 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an average of 12 inches (305 mm) apart, but not more than 18 inches (457 mm) apart.

3. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 36 inches (914 mm), and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped or butted at Contractor's option.

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.


A. Special Inspections and field quality control testing: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



B. Non-Compliant Work:


3.6 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.

1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view.


Section 054000 - 1 Cold Formed Metal Framing

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 05400 – COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

1.1 GENERAL

A. Summary: This section includes the following:

1. Exterior non-load bearing steel stud curtainwall.

2. Exterior load bearing steel stud walls.

3. Exterior non-load bearing steel stud framing.

4. Interior load bearing framing.

5. Steel Joists and rafters.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for masonry shelf angles and connections.

2. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for gypsum board and non-load bearing metal stud framing and ceiling suspension assemblies

C. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1) Design Loads: As indicated.

2) Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following:

2) Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height.

3) Interior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, framing shall comply with AISI S100, AISI S200, and the following:

1) Wall Studs: AISI S211.

2) Headers: AISI S212.

3) Lateral Design: AISI S213.

3. Design framing systems to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and construction tolerances.

4. Design exterior non-load bearing curtainwall framing to accommodate lateral deflection without regard to contribution of sheathing material.

5. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who assumes undivided responsibility for engineering cold frame metal framing by employing a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the state of the project location, to prepare design calculations, shop drawings, and other structural data.

Section 054000 - 2 Cold Formed Metal Framing

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

6. For all exterior metal stud framing other than exterior wall framing – 20ga minimum unless noted otherwise.

D. Submittals:

1. Product Data

2. Shop Drawings showing layout, spacing, size, thickness and type. Include fastening details, bracing, bridging, connection details and attachments to other units of work. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for it’s preparation.

1.2 PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Provide products manufactured by one of the following:

1. Dietrich Industries, Inc.

2. Marino/Ware; Division of Ware Industries

3. Unimest, Inc.

4. United States Steel or approved equal

1.3 EXECUTION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements, including installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cold formed metal framing.

B. Install cold formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Erection tolerances: Install cold formed metal framing to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8” in ten feet.

D. In curtainwall construction, isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical levels while providing lateral support.

E. Connect studs with vertical slide clips to continuous angles or supplementary framing anchored to building structure.

F. Install horizontal bridging in curtainwall studs, spaced in rows not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

G. Install gypsum sheathing board according to manufacturer’s instruction and GA-253 “Application of Gypsum Sheathing”.

H. Cover sheathing with air infiltration barrier as follows: Apply asphalt saturated organic felt horizontally, with 2” overlap and 6” endlap; fasten to sheathing with corrosion resistant staples.


Section 055000 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 055000

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Miscellaneous steel trim. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 4. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 5. Flat strap and backing plate.


A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that are compatible with paint systems specified in Division 9 Sections.

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

C. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width required to support fixture. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

2.8 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153 for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123 for other steel and iron products.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless indicated.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial

Blast Cleaning." 3. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.


Section 055113 - 1 METAL PAN STAIRS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 055113

METAL PAN STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 2. Steel Pipe and tube railings attached to metal stairs. 3. Steel Pipe and tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.


A. Product Data: For metal pan stairs.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs and railings.

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to

loads specified above.

C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.(0.093 sq. m).

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

D. Seismic Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 when designated on structural drawings.

1. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).

E. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

F. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205), unless another grade is required by design loads.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa) unless otherwise indicated.

D. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm), W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

E. Weld connections to comply with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary

Joint Finish Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Commercial Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Stair Framing:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements.

3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.

4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and struts where they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.

C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch (1.7 mm).

2.7 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.

1. Rails and Posts: Size and shape as indicated on drawings. 2. Picket Infill: Size and shape as indicated on drawings. Pickets spaced less than 4 inches

(100 mm) clear.

B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes are okay as shown in NAAMM AMP 521.

C. Form changes in direction of railings by bending.

D. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails.

G. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work.

I. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRS

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints.

D. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.2 INSTALLING RAILINGS

A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:

1. Anchor posts to steel by welding or bolting to steel supporting members.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with performance requirements.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.


Section 055213 - 1 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 055213

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe and tube railings. 2. Aluminum pipe and tube railings.


1. Section 055112 "Metal Pan Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal pan stairs.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:


a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.




2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

2.3 STEEL AND IRON

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).

C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 ALUMINUM

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required.

B. Extruded Bars and Tubing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5/T52.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6.

D. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210 (ASTM B 210M), Alloy 6063-T832.

E. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

F. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), Alloy 6061-T6.

G. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

2. Aluminum Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594(ASTM F 836M).


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

D. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.

E. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

F. Form changes in direction by bending.

G. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

H. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

I. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

J. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

B. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

B. Mill Finish: AA-M12, nonspecular as fabricated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m).

B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.

3.2 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.3 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

B. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between

studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs.

Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members or use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements or use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.


Section 057313 - 1 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 057313

GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Glass-supported railings. 2. Post-supported railings with glass infill.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

C. Preconstruction test reports.

D. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Architectural Railings & Grilles, Inc. 2. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. 3. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.

B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval.

C. Basis of Design:

1. Julius Blum & Co., Inc. – JB Glass rail System

a. Rails: BLUM No. 1130 b. Shoe molding: BLUM No. 1142 c. Glazing Accessories:

1) Setting block shall be of polyvinyl chloride (PVC); BLUM No. 8711. 2) Protective insert shall be of polyvinyl chloride (PVC); BLUM No. 8709. 3) Filler: Type as required. Color : To match Rails / Shoe.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.

B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:


a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.



Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018



3. Glass-Supported Railings: Support each section of top rail by a minimum of three glass panels or by other means so top rail will remain in place if any one panel fails.

2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 ALUMINUM

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for each aluminum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below.

B. Extruded Bars and Shapes, Including Extruded Tubing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5/T52.

C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6.

D. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210 (ASTM B 210M), Alloy 6063-T832.

E. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 5005-H32.

F. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), Alloy 6061-T6.

G. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.

2.5 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Safety Glazing: Glazing shall comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

B. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type 1 (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3. Provide products that have been tested for surface and edge compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength according to 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

1. Glass Color: Clear. 2. Thickness for Structural Glass Balusters: As required by structural loads, but not less than

12.0 mm. 3. Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: As required by structural loads, but not less than 12.0

mm.

C. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

D. Glazing Cement and Accessories for Structural Glazing: Glazing cement, setting blocks, shims, and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing structural glazing in metal subrails.

E. Glazing Gaskets for Glass Infill Panels: Glazing gaskets and related accessories recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing glass infill panels in post-supported railings.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Aluminum Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

C. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

D. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

E. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work where indicated.

2.9 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION

A. Structural Balusters: Provide tempered glass panels for both straight and curved sections.

B. Infill Panels: Provide tempered glass panels for both straight and curved sections.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. Unless noted otherwise.

B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

1. Color: As indicated on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

D. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

F. Glass-Supported Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Post-Supported Glass Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in other Part 3 articles. Erect posts and other metal railing components, then set factory-cut glass panels. Do not cut, drill, or alter glass panels in field. Protect edges from damage.


Section 061000 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 061000

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 2. Wood furring and grounds. 3. Plywood backing panels.

a. Provide backing panels coordinating size, locations, and equipment mounting requirements with the telecommunications and electrical equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. Include data for fasteners as recommended by treatment manufacturer or stainless steel. 4. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before

and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

5. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

6. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 2. Power-driven fasteners. 3. Powder-actuated fasteners. 4. Expansion anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on

end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.

3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for

fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

C. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness.

B. Dimension Lumber Framing: No. 2 grade and any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Southern pine; SPIB. 3. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Cants. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2. Mixed southern pine, No. 1 grade; SPIB. 3. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common grade; NLGA,

WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common grade;

NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or

WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or 2 Common grade; NeLMA,

NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 5. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 6. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness.

B. Provide backing panels coordinating size, locations, and equipment mounting requirements with the telecommunications and electrical equipment.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, fire retardant treated or in areas of high relative humidity, provide fasteners as recommended by pressure-preservative or fire retardant treatment manufacturer or provide stainless steel.

a. Where fasteners are in contact with dissimilar metals, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material for Fasteners installed in conditioned (heated and air-conditioned) interior paces: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material for Fasteners installed in exterior and unconditioned (heated only, or ventilated only) interior spaces: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.


A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

E. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.

2. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c.

F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

H. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

I. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.


Section 064116 - 1 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 064116

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural casework. 3. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced

architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.


1. Section 123623.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops."


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

C. Samples:

1. Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish. 2. Thermoset decorative panels, for each color, pattern, and surface finish. 3. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.


A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS AND CASEWORK

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified.

B. Grade: Premium.

C. Type of Construction: Face frame.

D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Reveal Dimension for Reveal Doors when indicated: 1 inch (26 mm).

F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Formica Corporation. b. Nevamar; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand. c. Pionite; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand. d. Wilsonart International Holdings, Inc.

G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for doors and fixed panels, horizontally for drawer fronts.

Unless noted otherwise on drawings.

H. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.

I. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.

J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of standard colors and finishes.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay. 4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive

containing no urea formaldehyde. 5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with

thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

1. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively.

2.4 CABINET / CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening.

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.

F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. Self-closing.

1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; full-extension type; epoxy-coated steel with polymer rollers.

2. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel ball-bearing slides.

3. For drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm)wide, provide Grade 1.

4. For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1.

5. For drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.

6. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1. 7. For trash bins not more than 20 inches (500 mm) high and 16 inches (400 mm) wide,

provide Grade 1HD-100.

H. Aluminum Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063.

I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. When indicated on drawings.

J. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. When indicated on drawings.

K. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

L. Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3, 3.0 mm thick.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

M. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Shelves: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3; with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick.

N. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Finish: As indicated on drawings.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: As recommended by Plastic Laminate manufacturer.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

C. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

C. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

D. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch(38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.


Section 066100 - 1 SHEATHING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 066100

SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Glass-mat gypsum sheathing board. 2. Weather Barrier. 3. Sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment. 4. Exterior framing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology Standard: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum sheathing board construction not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

B. International Code Council Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards.

2. Shop Drawings: Show details of building wrap at terminations, openings, and penetrations. Show details of flexible flashing applications.

3. Provide documentation showing compliance with NFPA 285 as required by 2012 International Building Code or later codes, for combustible weather-resistive barriers.

4. Provide documentation showing proposed product compliance with the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) requirements for air barriers, and listing of the proposed product on the ABAA web site.

5. Installation Accessories Tapes, precut closure pieces and other items required or recommended by the manufacturer): Manufacturer’s data sheets and complete installation requirements and recommendations.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, or other causes. Stack sheathing flat on leveled supports off the ground, under cover, and fully protected from weather.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board:

1. Do not leave exposed to weather for more than 180 days.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM SHEATHING

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177, paperless, with glass mat facing on, or embedded into each side of a water-resistant gypsum core.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. GlasRoc, CertainTeed Corporation 800-233-8990 www.certainteed.com

b. Dens-Glass Gold, Georgia-Pacific 800-225-6119 www.gp.com

c. Securock Glass-Mat Sheathing, USG Corporation 800-950-3839 www.usg.com

d. e²XP™ Wallboard Sheathing, National Gypsum Company 704-365-7300 www.nationalgypsum.com

2. Type and thickness: Regular, refer to Drawings for thickness.

3. Size: 48 by 96 inches.

2.2 WEATHER BARRIER

A. Basis of Design: spunbonded polyolefin, non-woven, non-perforated, weather barrier; DuPont™ Tyvek® CommercialWrap® and related assembly components.

B. Performance Characteristics:

1. Air Penetration: 0.001 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM E1677. ≤0.04 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2357

2. Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B.

3. Water Penetration Resistance: 280 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

4. Basis Weight: 2.7 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410.

5. Air Resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460.

6. Tensile Strength: 38/35 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method A.

7. Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117.

8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame Spread: 10, Smoke Developed: 10.

C. Accessories: Provide manufacturer’s recommended accessories including, but not limited to, flashing, seam tape, sealants, flashing primer and fasteners.

2.3 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board:

1. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing, recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners.

2. Glass-Fiber Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads/m), of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing board and with a history of successful in-service use.

2.4 FRAMING SYSTEMS

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation as follows:

1. Retain minimum grade requirements from options in "Grade" Subparagraph below. If more than one grade option is required, indicate location of each on Drawings.

2. Grade: ST50H.

3. Coating: G60, A60, AZ50, or GF30.

C. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.

2. Depth: 7/8 inch.

D. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and 2-inch depth.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

1. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, attach sheathing with drill screws complying with ASTM C 954.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 METAL FRAMED ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

B. Install z-furring and hat shaped channel in orientation shown on Drawings for each application of fiber cement siding. Comply with fiber cement siding manufacturer recommendation for spacing.

C. Direct Furring:

1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.2 SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253, ASTM C 1280 and the manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install boards with a 3/8 inch setback where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements.

2. Install boards with a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) setback where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall assembly.

D. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match spacing of structural support elements.

F. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over flanges of steel studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o. c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.

G. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of stud flanges, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o. c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9 mm) from edges and ends of boards.

3.3 SHEATHING TREATMENT

A. Seal sheathing, according to sheathing manufacturer's written recommendations at joints, screws, holes, imperfections, and any other discontinuities in the sheathing substrate which disrupt the continuous and homogeneous sheathing substrate. Where the Manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements are less than described below, never provide less than the following.

1. Joints (with screws): Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing board joints and screw heads, and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed sealant in entire face of tape.

2. Fasteners: Apply 3-course seal over screw heads as follows: 1.) sealant or mastic with a trowel, 2.) glass-fiber sheathing tape and 3.) another layer of sealant or mastic with a trowel, so fasteners are completely covered.

3. Other Openings: Seal all other penetrations and openings. Small holes less than a 1/4 inch the same method as the exposed fasteners. For openings measuring larger than 1/4 inch in any direction, patch the holes by inserting backer-rod fillers into the holes and by applying sealant over the fillers to close the openings. Treat the hole patches the same way as the fasteners by applying a layer of tape over the already in-place sealant, and cover the tape with another layer of sealant.

3.4 WEATHER BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Install weather barrier over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

B. Install weather barrier prior to installation of windows and doors.

C. Start weather barrier installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12 inches of weather barrier extended beyond corner to overlap.

D. Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

E. Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

F. Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings.

G. Overlap weather barrier

1. Exterior corners: minimum 12 inches.

2. Seams: minimum 6 inches.

H. Weather Barrier Attachment:

1. Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners, space 12 -18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on center, maximum horizontally. If cladding anchors are used and with weather barrier manufacturer’s approval, cladding anchors may be used to fasten the weather barrier.

I. If Cladding Anchors are Approved: Apply 4 inch by 7 inch piece of DuPont™ StraightFlash™ or weather barrier manufacturer approved alternate to weather barrier membrane prior to the installation cladding anchors.


Section 071326 - 1 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 071326

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes self-adhering modified bituminous sheet waterproofing for below grade walls.

B. See Section 071700 Bentonite Waterproofing for waterproofing the elevator pit.



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.


A. Sample warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by waterproofing manufacturer.

B. Products shall be obtained from one manufacturer and installed by a one contractor.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard materials-only warranty in which manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement waterproofing material for waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING - VERTICAL SURFACES

A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Minimum 60-mil nominal thickness, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil- thick, polyethylene-film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side; formulated for application with primer or surface conditioner that complies with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing – Two coat system provides the basis of this specification and shall consist of the following:

a. Base Coat; CCW 703V;60 mil thickness b. Topcoat: CCW- MIRADRI 860 c. Protection:Layer:CCW Protection Fabric and 1” of Extruded Polystyrene

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended and provided by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.

1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer.

C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer.

D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, of trowel grade or low viscosity.

E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, modified asphalt coating.

F. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch centers.

G. Extruded Polystyreene:1”thickness, ASTM C578, Type X, 30 psi. (Styrofoam, SquareEdge)


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Prepare surfaces and install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 6135.

B. Apply cold fluid-applied, two component waterproofing at 60 mils dry film thickness per manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

D. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.

1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self-adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F.

E. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent underslab waterproofing utilizing manufacturer’s standard details.

F. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.

G. Immediately install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane.

3.2 PROTECTION, REPAIR, AND CLEANING

A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.

B. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

C. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.


A. Eengage a site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish daily reports to Architect.


Section 071700 - 1 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 071700

BENTONITE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bentonite waterproofing at the elevator pit slab and walls. 2. See Section 071326 - Self Adhering Sheet Waterproofing for waterproofing at vertical

walls.

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original manufacturer’s packaging and store materials in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Remove and replace products that have been prematurely exposed to moisture.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Install materials in accordance with all safety and weather conditions required by the manufacturer.

B. Install materials only after work on the applicable substrate is complete.



B. Shop Drawings: Include installation details for waterproofing, penetrations, and interface with other work.


A. Product certificates.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Sample warranty.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of bentonite waterproofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


1.8 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer: Provide Geotextile/Bentonite Clay waterproofing membrane produced by a manufacturer with a minimum of 5 years experience in the waterproofing industry.

B. Installer: A firm with a minimum of 2 years experience in installing bentonite clay or other related waterproofing products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BENTONITE CLAY WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

A. Product provided by this Section is a uniform layer of sodium bentonite clay that is sandwiched between a durable puncture-resistant nonwoven polypropylene fabric and a high-tensile strength woven polypropylene fabric and then needle punched together with thousands of high-strength denier yarns.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing – CCW MiraCLAY. System shall consist of the following and provides the basis for this specification. Other equivalent systems shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect

2. Provide Two (2) layers of CCW MiraCLAY at underslab and footing areas.

C. Product properties:

Property Bentonite Content Test Method Value

— 1.0 lb/ft2 (.488 kg/m2)*

Nominal Dry Thickness — 0.25 in (6.4 mm)

Weight — 75 lb (34.05 kg)

Permeability ASTM D 5084 5 x 10-9 cm/sec

Puncture Resistance ASTM D 4833 120 psi (828 kPa)

Swell Index ASTM D 5890 2g (24 ml) min.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Adhesion to Concrete ASTM D903 17.7 lb/in (8 kg/cm)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine substrate and condition under which waterproofing will be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Grade Substrates: Shall be level and uniform that is compacted to a minimum of 85% modified proctor

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Utilize manufacturer’s standard details to tie in horizontal and vertical membranes.

B. Prevent geotextile/bentonite clay waterproofing membrane from hydrating before being covered with overburden. When threat of rain is imminent or backfill is not immediate, geotextile/bentonite clay waterproofing membrane should be covered with polyethylene sheeting.

C. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or another method that does not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.

D. Install CCW MiraCLAY with the white non-woven side up, facing the installer.

E. Overlap edges a minimum of 4” (10 cm).

F. Protect CCW MiraCLAY from damage caused by chairs with sharp edges or points by placing a patch of CCW MiraCLAY under the chair.

G. Staple joints often enough to prevent excessive movement.

H. Pour CCW MiraCLAY Granules or trowel CCW MiraCLAY Sealant around all penetrations and press in “cut-to-fit” collars of CCW MiraCLAY.

I. Extend the installation of CCW MiraCLAY 12" (31 cm) up or beyond the perimeter slab forms.



Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Section 071900 - 1 WATER REPELLENTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 071900

WATER REPELLENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical surfaces:

1. Concrete unit masonry.





B. Samples: For each type of water repellent and substrate indicated.




A. Applicator Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS

A. Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 20 percent or more solids of alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs.



Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems. b. Diedrich Technologies, a division of Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. d. Pecora Corporation.

2. All CMU (cinder or concrete block, split face, scored, smooth, high density, low density, fluted) above grade when the structure has a basement below grade

a. Diedrich – 333-L 20% Omegaseal Water Repellent – 20% (2 Coats)

B. Siloxane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 10 percent or more solids of oligomerous alkylalkoxysiloxanes; with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs.


a. Diedrich Technologies, a division of Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. b. H&C Concrete Care Products, Sherwin-Williams Company (The). c. The Sherwin-Williams, H&C® Company.

2. CMU backup walls (All CMU walls faced with face Brick or CMU)

a. Solvent-Borne Siloxane: Clear (Where permitted by Law) 1) Diedrich – 303-S Siloxseal Siloxane Water Repellent – 10% (2 Coats) 2) S-W H&C® HB-100 – (2 Coats)

b. Water Reducible Siloxane: Clear (If solvent based is not permitted) 1) Diedrich – 303-WB Siloxseal Siloxane Water Repellent – 10% (2 Coats) 2) S-W Loxon® 7% Siloxane Water Repellant, A10T7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's requirements. Check moisture content in representative locations by method recommended by manufacturer.

2. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped beneath the application of water repellent.

3. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent.

B. Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure chemical bond to silica-containing or siliceous minerals.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Coordination with Mortar Joints: Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment has been installed and cured.

C. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.

1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those required.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used.

B. Apply coating of water repellent on surfaces to be treated using low-pressure spray to the point of saturation. Apply coating in dual passes of uniform, overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure unless otherwise indicated.

C. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused by water-repellent application.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.


Section 072100 - 1 THERMAL INSULATION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 072100

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concealed building insulation. 2. Safing Insulation. 3. Foundation insulation

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. For the purpose of this section the terms Batt and Blanket, when referencing thermal or acoustical insulation, are herein understood to be synonymous.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for insulation products.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.

B. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type VI, Drainage Panels foundation insulation: ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels.

C. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type X cavity wall insulation: ASTM C 578, Type X, 15-psiminimum compressive strength; unfaced; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Provide a product equal to Dow Styrofoam brand CavityMate extruded polystyrene insulation.

D. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Reinforced-Foil Faced: ASTM C665, Type III (reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.

1. Provide a product equal to Certainteed CertaPro Thermal FSK-25 Faced Batts.

E. Unfaced Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from glass; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

a. CertainTeed www.certainteed.com b. Johns Manville 800-654-3103 www.jm.com c. EcoBatt, Knauf Insulation 800-825-4434 www.knaufinsulation.us d. Owens Corning 800-438-7465 www.owenscorning.com


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.2 SAFING INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES

A. Semi-Refractory Fiber Board Safing Insulation: Semi-rigid boards designed for use as a fire stop at openings between edge of slab and exterior wall panels, top of interior partition and metal floor deck/roof deck, and miscellaneous floor, roof, and wall penetrations, produced by combining semi-refractory mineral fiber manufactured from slag with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612, Class 1 and 2; nominal density of 4.0 pcf; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; r-value of 4.0 at 75 deg F.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

a. USG Corporation 800-950-3839 www.usg.com

B. Calking Compound: Material approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for sealing joint between foil backing of safing insulation and edge opening against penetration of smoke.

C. Safing Clips: Galvanized steel safing clips approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for holding safing insulation in place.

2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors:

a. Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers, AGM Industries, Inc. 800-225-9990 www.agmind.com

b. Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners, Eckel Industries of Canada Limited 613-543-2967 www.eckel.ca

c. Spindle Type, Gemco 800-331-1164 www.gemcoinsulation.com

2. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchor:

a. 90-Degree Insulation Hangers, Gemco 800-331-1164 www.gemcoinsulation.com

3. Insulation-Retaining Washers:

a. RC150, AGM Industries, Inc. 800-225-9990 www.agmind.comb. SC150, AGM Industries, Inc. 800-225-9990 www.agmind.comc. Dome-Cap, Gemco 800-331-1164 www.gemcoinsulation.comd. R-150, Gemco 800-331-1164 www.gemcoinsulation.come. S-150, Gemco 800-331-1164 www.gemcoinsulation.com

4. Insulation Standoff:

a. Clutch Clip, Gemco 800-331-1164 www.gemcoinsulation.com


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

5. Anchor Adhesives:

a. TACTOO Adhesive, AGM Industries, Inc. 800-225-9990 www.agmind.comb. Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive, Eckel Industries of Canada Limited 613-543-

2967 www.eckel.cac. Tuff bond Hanger Adhesive, Gemco 800-331-1164

www.gemcoinsulation.com

B. Anchor below is an example of a mechanical fastener. Prong anchors, welding pins, pointed rods, etc., are also available. Insert as required.

C. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.

2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

D. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- (0.762-mm-) thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with each leg 2 inches (50 mm) square.

2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

E. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square or in diameter.

1. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:

a. Crawlspaces. b. Ceiling plenums. c. Attic spaces.

F. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of dimension indicated between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached.

1. Air Space: 1 inch (25 mm).

G. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.



Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing or interfering with insulation attachment.

B. Close off openings in cavities receiving poured-in-place insulation to prevent escape of insulation. Provide bronze or stainless-steel screens (inside) where openings must be maintained for drainage or ventilation.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Seal joint between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Install glass-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs.

D. Install rigid insulation in walls formed by cold-formed metal framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

E. Installing rigid cavity-wall insulation over masonry substrate: Where dampproofing is not utilized as an adhesive surface for application of board cavity-wall insulation, install small pads of compatible adhesive spaced approximately 1 foot o.c. both ways on inside face of boards. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.

1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry.

F. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction according to curtain-wall manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel surface. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between insulation and spandrel surface. Install insulation where it contacts safing to prevent insulation from bowing under pressure from safing.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION

A. Butt panels together for tight fit.

B. Anchor Installation: Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application.

D. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation.

E. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF SAFING INSULATION

A. Install perimeter safing insulation to fill gap between edge of concrete floor slab and back of spandrel panel insulation of exterior curtain-wall systems to comply with fire-containment system manufacturer's written instructions to produce installations with ratings matching those established during fire-test-response testing.

B. At fire rated construction, stuff loose safing insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown and if not shown, to fill voids at tops of walls, around structural steel penetrations of walls and mechanical/electrical penetrations of walls. Compact to approximately 40% of normal maximum volume, and seal joints and/or surface with calking compound indicated to prevent the passage of smoke.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.


Section 072419 - 1 WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 072419

WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that are field applied over substrate.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistant building paper or building wrap

and flexible flashings installed over sheathing behind mechanically fastened EIFS.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASTM E 2110 apply to Work of this Section.

B. EIFS: Exterior insulation and finish system(s).

C. IBC: International Building Code.




A. Product Data: For each EIFS component, trim, and accessory, including water-resistive barrier coatings.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include details for EIFS buildouts.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 8 inches square in size.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated.

1. Include similar Samples of exposed accessories involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: 24-inch-square panels for each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work, including.

1. Include exposed trim and accessory Samples to verify color selected. 2. Include a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected, as specified in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by EIFS manufacturer, certifying the following:

1. EIFS complies with requirements. 2. Substrates to which EIFS is indicated to be attached are acceptable to EIFS manufacturer. 3. Accessory products installed with EIFS, including joint sealants, flashing, trim, whether

or not furnished by EIFS manufacturer and whether or not specified in this Section, are acceptable to EIFS manufacturer.

C. Product Certificates: For insulation and joint sealant, from manufacturer.

D. Product Test Reports: For each EIFS assembly and component, and for water-resistive barrier coatings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by AWCI International as qualified to install Class PB EIFS using trained workers.


A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly identifying products.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and other causes.

1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. 2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating

materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate temperatures permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1. Proceed with installation of adhesives or coatings only when ambient temperatures have remained, or are forecast to remain, above 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for a minimum of 24 hours before, during, and after application. Do not apply EIFS adhesives or coatings during rainfall.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Bond integrity and weathertightness. b. Deterioration of EIFS finishes and other EIFS materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty coverage includes the following components of EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies:

a. EIFS finish, including base coats, finish coats, and reinforcing mesh. b. Insulation installed as part of EIFS. c. Insulation adhesive and mechanical fasteners. d. EIFS accessories, including trim components and flashing. e. Water-resistive barrier coatings. f. EIFS drainage components.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 2. Senergy; BASF Corp. 3. Sto Corp.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with EIFS components.


A. EIFS Performance: Comply with ASTM E 2568 and with the following:

1. Weathertightness: Resistant to uncontrolled water penetration from exterior, with a means to drain water entering EIFS to the exterior.

2. Structural Performance of Assembly and Components: a. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings.

3. Impact Performance: ASTM E 2568, High impact resistance. 4. Abrasion Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick EIFS

mounted on 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days and shows no cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts (500 L) of sand when tested according to ASTM D 968, Method A.

5. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch (50.8-by-50.8-mm) clean glass substrate; cured for 28 days and shows no growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274.

6. Drainage Efficiency: 90 percent average minimum when tested according to ASTM E 2273.

2.3 EIFS MATERIALS

A. Water-Resistive Barrier Coating: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as water-resistive barrier coating; compatible with substrate.

1. Water-Resistance: Comply with physical and performance criteria of ASTM E 2570.

B. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt, and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.

C. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use;compatible with substrate; and complying with one of the following:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, and polymer-based adhesive specified for base coat.

2. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and fillers specified for base coat.

3. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation designed for adhesive attachment of insulation to substrates of type indicated, as recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

D. Drainage Mat: Three-dimensional, nonwoven, entangled filament, nylon or plastic mat designed to drain incidental moisture by gravity; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners suitable for intended substrate.

E. Molded, (Expanded) Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM E 2430/E 2430M, unless otherwise noted, and the following:

1. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, according to ASTM E 84.

2. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards of not more than 24 by 48 inches, with thickness indicated on Drawings.

3. Channeled Board Insulation: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-fabricated profile with linear, vertical-drainage channels, slots, or waves on the back side of board.

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. (21 dN/cm) according to ASTM E 2098 and the following:

1. Reinforcing Mesh for EIFS, General: Not less than weight required to comply with impact-performance level specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Strip-Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. 3. Detail-Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 4. Corner-Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd.

G. Base Coat: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with one of the following: 1. Job-combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive and

manufacturer's standard dry mix containing portland cement. 2. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and inert

fillers to which only water is added at Project site.

H. Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat.

I. Finish Coat: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating complying with the following:

1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers.

2. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

J. Sealer; if recommended by manufacturer over finish coat: Manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic-based sealer for protecting finish coat.

K. Water: Potable.

L. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard cell class for use intended, and ASTM C 1063.

1. Casing Bead: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg.

2. Drip Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with face leg extended to form a drip, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg.

3. Weep Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with perforated face leg extended to form a drip and weep holes in track bottom, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg; designed to drain incidental moisture that gets into wall construction to the exterior at terminations of EIFS with drainage.

4. Expansion Joint: Closed-cell polyethylene backer rod and elastomeric sealant 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) minimum.

5. Windowsill Flashing: Prefabricated type for both flashing and sloping sill over framing beneath windows; with end and back dams; designed to direct water to exterior.

2.4 MIXING

A. Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials, except as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.


1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry. 2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coats on other work.

B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of substrates.

C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.

1. Concrete Substrates: Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for insulation installation. Verify suitability of substrate by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 1397, ASTM E 2511, and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.

3.4 SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION

A. Water-Resistive Barrier Coating: Apply over sheathing to provide a water-resistive barrier.

1. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over water-resistive barrier coating, applied and lapped to shed water; seal at openings, penetrations, and terminations. Prime substrates with flashing primer if required and install flashing.

3.5 TRIM INSTALLATION

A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, at windowsills, and elsewhere as indicated. Coordinate with installation of insulation.

1. Weep Screed/Track: Use at bottom termination edges, at window and door heads, and at floor line expansion joints of water-drainage EIFS unless otherwise indicated.

2. Windowsill Flashing: Use at windows unless otherwise indicated. 3. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings. 4. Casing Bead: Use at other locations.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.6 DRAINAGE MAT INSTALLATION

A. Drainage Mat: Apply wrinkle free, continuously, with edges butted and mechanically secured with fasteners over water-resistive barrier coating.

3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397 and the following: 1. Apply adhesive to ridges on back of channeled insulation by notched-trowel method in a

manner that results in full adhesive contact over the entire surface of ridges, leaving channels free of adhesive once insulation is adhered to substrate.

2. Press and slide insulation into place. Apply pressure over entire surface of insulation to accomplish uniform contact, high initial grab, and overall level surface.

3. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for not less than 24 hours, before beginning rasping and sanding insulation or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh.

a. Steel Framing: 5/16 inch. b. Concrete and Masonry: 1 inch.

4. Apply insulation over substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented horizontally.

5. Begin first course of insulation from screed/track and work upward. Work from perimeter casing beads toward interior of panels if possible.

6. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints, so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide or 6 inches (150 mm) high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners of window and door openings.

a. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from horizontal and 4 inches (100 mm) from vertical joints in sheathing.

b. Mechanical Attachment: Offset joints of insulation from horizontal joints in sheathing.

7. Apply channeled insulation, with drainage channels aligned vertically. 8. Interlock ends at internal and external corners. 9. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,

continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using adhesive or other material.

10. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes complying with details indicated.

11. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Prevent airborne dispersal and immediately collect insulation raspings or sandings.

12. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated. 13. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges

and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh.

14. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within EIFS and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining surfaces of width indicated.

15. Before installing insulation and before applying field-applied reinforcing mesh, fully wrap board edges. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) over front and back face unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

16. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows:

a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat.

b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh.

c. At edges trimmed by accessories, extend base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat over face leg of accessories.

17. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and water-resistive barrier coating.

B. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as follows:

1. At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS. 2. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other

EIFS. 3. At floor lines in multilevel wood-framed construction. 4. Where wall height or building shape changes. 5. Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations.

3.8 BASE-COAT APPLICATION

A. Water-Resistant Base Coat: Apply full-thickness coverage to exposed insulation and to exposed surfaces of window sills, parapets and to other surfaces indicated on Drawings.

B. Base Coat: Apply full coverage to exposed insulationwith not less than 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) dry-coat thickness.

C. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed reinforcing mesh in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with mesh continuous at corners, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8inches (200 mm) of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are invisible.

D. Double-Layer Reinforcing-Mesh Application: Where indicated or required, apply second base coat and second layer of reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 in same manner as first application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

E. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip-reinforcing mesh around openings, extending 4 inches (100 mm) beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip-reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch-wide, strip-reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4 inches (100 mm) on each side of corners. 1. Embed strip-reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing

mesh.

F. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first application, except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.

3.9 FINISH-COAT APPLICATION

A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat.

B. Finish Coat: Apply full-thickness coverage over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations.

C. Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by EIFS manufacturer.


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Water-resistive barrier coatings applied over sheathing.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. EIFS Tests and Inspections: According to ASTM E 2359.

D. EIFS will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings.


Section 074245 - 1 FIBER CEMENT WALL PANELS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 074245

FIBER CEMENT WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Exterior, panelized fiber cement cladding system and accessories to complete a drained and back-ventilated rainscreen.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA 509-09 – Voluntary Test and Classification Method of Drained and Back

Ventilated Rain Screen Wall Cladding Systems

B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties

by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 2. ASTM C 1185 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Non-Asbestos Fiber

Cement. a. ASTM C 1186 – Standard Specification for Flat Fiber-Cement Sheets.

3. ASTM E-84 - Standard Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and

Materials. 5. ASTM E 228 - Standard Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid Materials

with a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer. 6. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 7. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 8. ASTM G 23 - Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc

Type) with and without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials, Replaced by G152 and G153.

C. Florida Building Code - Test Protocol HVHZ 1. Testing Application Standard (TAS) 201, 202, 203 – Impact Test Procedures

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. NFPA 285 - Fire Test Method for Exterior Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Material.

2. NFPA 268 – Ignition Resistance of Exterior Wall Assemblies.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product description, storage and handling requirements, and installation instructions.

B. Product Test Reports and Code Compliance: Documents demonstrating product compliance with local building code, such as test reports or Evaluation Reports from qualified, independent testing agencies.

C. Manufacturer’s Details: Submit drawings (.dwg, .rvt, and/or .pdf formats), including plans, sections, showing installation details that demonstrate product dimensions, edge/termination conditions/treatments, compression and control joints, corners, openings, and penetrations.

D. Samples: Submit samples of each product type proposed for use.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. All fiber cement panels specified in this section must be supplied by a manufacturer with

a minimum of 10 years of experience in fabricating and supplying fiber cement cladding systems.

2. Provide technical and design support as needed regarding installation requirements and warranty compliance provisions.

B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer trained by manufacturer or representative.

C. Pre-Installation Meetings: Prior to beginning installation, conduct conference to verify and discuss substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions, mock-up, warranty requirements, and project requirements.


A. Panels must be stored flat and kept dry before installation. A waterproof cover over panels and accessories should be used at all times prior to installation.

B. If panels are exposed to water or water vapor prior to installation, allow to completely dry before installing. Failure to do so may result in panel shrinkage at ship lap joints, and such action may void warranty.

C. Carry panels on edge. Do not carry or lift panels flat. Store panels out of contact with the ground.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s 50-year warranty against manufactured defects in fiber cement panels.

B. Provide manufacturer’s 15-year warranty against manufactured defects in panel finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Nichiha Corporation, 18-19 Nishiki 2-chome Naka-ku, Nagoya, Aichi 460-8610, Japan.

B. Acceptable Manufacturer’s Representative: Nichiha USA, Inc., 6465 E. Johns Crossing, Suite 250, Johns Creek, GA 30097. Toll free: 1.866.424.4421, Office: 770.805.9466, Fax: 770.805.9467, www.nichiha.com.

1. Product: Nichiha Illumination Series. a. Profile colors: Finish and color as selected by the Architect. b. Profiles:

1) AWP-3030 Panel: No score lines. Wider, soft-U chamfered edge at horizontal joints.

c. Accessory/Component Options: 1) Manufactured Corners with 3-1/2” returns for each profile size and color.

a) Do not used AWP-1818 Corners with AWP-3030 Panels. 2) Aluminum trim to be painted per finish schedule: Outside corners (Corner

Key, Open Outside Corner), vertical joints (H-Mold), terminations (J-Mold). 3) Essential Flashing System: Starter, Compression Joint, Overhang.

d. Dimensions: 1) AWP-3030: 455mm (17-7/8”) (h) x 3,030 mm (119-5/16”) (I).

e. Panel Thickness: 16 mm (5/8"). f. Finish: Matte, smooth. g. Weight: AWP-3030: 57.32 lbs. per panel. h. Coverage: 14.81 sq. ft. per panel (3030). i. Factory sealed on six 6 sides.

2. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fiber cement panels manufactured from a pressed, stamped, and autoclaved mix of Portland cement, fly ash, silica, recycled rejects, and wood fiber bundles.

B. Panel surface pre-finished and machine applied.

C. Factory-applied sealant gasket added to top and right panel edges; all joints contain a factory sealant.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Fiber Cement Cladding – Must comply with ASTM C-1186, Type A, Grade II requirements: 1. Wet Flexural Strength, lower limit: 1015 psi. 2. Water Tightness: No water droplets observed on any specimen. 3. Freeze-thaw: No damage or defects observed. 4. Warm Water: No evidence of cracking, delamination, swelling, or other defects observed. 5. Heat-Rain: No crazing, cracking, or other deleterious effects, surface or joint changes

observed in any specimen.

B. Mean Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion (ASTM E-228): Max 1.0*10^-5 in./in. F.

C. Surface Burning (CAN-ULC S102/ASTM E-84): Flame Spread: 0, Smoke Developed: 5.

D. Wind Load (ASTM E-330): Contact manufacturer for ultimate test pressure data corresponding to framing type, dimensions, fastener type, and attachment clips. Project engineer(s) must determine Zone 4 and 5 design pressures based on project specifics. 1. Minimum lateral deflection: L/120.

E. Water Penetration (ASTM E-331): No water leakage observed into wall cavity.

F. Weather Resistant (ASTM G-23): No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, or other detrimental effects observed.

G. Steady-State Heat Flux and Thermal Transmission Properties Test (ASTM C-518): thermal resistance R Value of 1.23.

H. Fire Resistant (ASTM E-119): The wall assembly must successfully endure 60-minute fire exposure without developing excessive unexposed surface temperature or allowing flaming on the unexposed side of the assembly.

I. Ignition Resistance (NFPA 268): No sustained flaming of panels, assembly when subjected to a minimum radiant heat flux of 12.5 kW/m2 ± 5% in the presence of a pilot ignition source for a 20-minute period.

J. Fire Propagation (NFPA 285): Wall assembly of Nichiha AWP, Ultimate Clips and Starter Track, Tyvek Commercial Wrap, ½” Densglass Gold Sheathing, 16” o.c. 18 gauge steel studs, mineral wool in-cavity insulation, and interior 5/8” Type X gypsum met the acceptance criteria of NFPA 285.

K. Drained and Back Ventilated Rainscreen (AAMA 509-09): System must pass all component tests.

2.4 INSTALLATION COMPONENTS

A. Ultimate Clip System: 1. Starter Track:

a. Horizontal Panel Installations - FA 700 - 3,030mm (l) galvalume.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Panel Clips: JEL 777 “Ultimate Clip” (10mm rainscreen for 16mm AWP) – Zinc-Aluminum-Magnesium alloy coated steel. a. Joint Tab Attachments (included) – used at all AWP-1818 panel to panel vertical

joints. NOT used with AWP-3030 installations. 3. Single Flange Sealant Backer – FHK 1017 (10mm) – 6.5’ (l) fluorine coated galvalume. 4. Double Flange Sealant Backer – FH 1020 (10mm) – 10’ (l) fluorine coated galvalume. 5. Corrugated Spacer – FS 1005 (5mm), FS 1010 (10mm) – 4’ (l). 6. Finish Clip – JE310 (5mm)

B. Aluminum Trim: Finish as selected by Architect.

C. Essential Flashing System: 1. Starter – main segments (3030mm), inside corners, outside corners 2. Compression Joint – main segments (3030mm) 3. Overhang – main segments (3030mm), inside corners, outside corners, joint clips

D. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant fasteners, such as hot-dipped galvanized screws appropriate to local building codes and practices must be used. Use Stainless Steel fasteners in high humidity and high-moisture regions. Panel manufacturer is not liable for corrosion resistance of fasteners. Do not use aluminum fasteners, staples or fasteners that are not rated or designed for intended use. See manufacturer’s instructions for appropriate fasteners for construction method used.

E. Flashing: Flash all areas specified in manufacturer’s instructions. Do not use raw aluminum flashing. Flashing must be galvanized, anodized, or PVC coated.

F. Sealant: Sealant shall comply with ASTM C920.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Fiber cement panels can be installed over braced wood, steel studs and sheathing

including plywood, OSB, plastic foam or fiberboard sheathing. Fiber cement panels can also be installed over Structural Insulated Panels (SIP’s), Concrete Masonry Units (CMU’s) and Concrete Block Structures (CBS’s) with furring strips, and Pre-Engineered Metal Construction. Insulated Concrete Forms (ICFs) are NOT an approved substrate under any condition.

2. Allowable stud spacing: 16” o.c. maximum. 3. A weather resistive barrier is required when installing fiber cement panels. Refer to

specification Section 066100. 4. Appropriate metal flashing should be used to prevent moisture penetration around all

doors, windows, wall bottoms, material transitions and penetrations. Refer to local building codes for best practices.

B. Examine site to ensure substrate conditions are within specification for proper installation.

C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Do not install panels or components that appear to be damaged or defective. Do not install wet panels.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install products in accordance with the latest installation guidelines of the manufacturer and all applicable building codes and other laws, rules, regulations and ordinances. Review all manufacturer installation, maintenance instructions, and other applicable documents before installation.

1. Consult with manufacturer before installing fiber cement product on a building higher than 45 feet or three stories or for conditions not matching prescribed standard installation guide requirements and methods. Special installation conditions may be required via a Technical Review and Special Applications Form (SAF) process.

2. Vertical Control/Expansion Joints are required within 2-10 feet of outside corners finished with metal trim and approximately every 30 feet thereafter.

3. Horizontal/Compression Joints are required for multi-story installations of AWP. Locate joints at floor lines. Joints are flashed minimum ½” breaks. Do not caulk. Refer to installation guide(s). a. Steel framed buildings (including reinforced concrete core with LGMF exterior

walls) of more than three floors (or 45 feet) require a compression joint every 25 feet at a floor line.

B. Panel Cutting 1. Always cut fiber cement panels outside or in a well-ventilated area. Do not cut the

products in an enclosed area. 2. Always wear safety glasses and NIOSH/OSHA approved respirator whenever cutting,

drilling, sawing, sanding or abrading the products. Refer to manufacturer SDS for more information.

3. Use a dust-reducing circular saw with a diamond-tipped or carbide-tipped blade. a. Recommended circular saw: Makita 7-1/4” Circular Saw with Dust Collector

(#5057KB). b. Recommended blade: Tenryu Board-Pro Plus PCD Blade (#BP-18505). c. Shears (electric or pneumatic) or jig saw can be used for complicated cuttings,

such as service openings, curves, radii and scrollwork.

3.3 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Review manufacturer guidelines for detailed care instructions.


Section 075323 -1 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 075323

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Adhered ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM) roofing system. 2. Roof insulation and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.


A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Sheet roofing, of color required. 2. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.


A. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation fasteners for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.


A. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

B. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

C. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class C; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.3 EPDM ROOFING

A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced uniform, flexible EPDM sheet.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products. c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

2. Thickness: 60 mils nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black

2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil-thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Seaming Material: Single-component, butyl splicing adhesive and splice cleaner. Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch-wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film.

E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

F. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, metal termination bars, metal battens, pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, molded pipe boot flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories.

2.5 ROOF INSULATION

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.

B. Manufacturers; Basis of Design: Firestone ISO 95+ GL Insulation or equal by one of the following:

1. Atlas Roofing Corporation. 2. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Thermal Resistance: R-24.

2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation Manufacturer’s recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another layer.

2.7 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. Color; black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

C. Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition.

3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

C. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:

1. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

3.3 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before installing.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of roofing.

D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeters.

E. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing terminations.

1. Apply a continuous bead of in-seam sealant before closing splice if required by roofing system manufacturer.

F. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing terminations.

G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.

H. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.4 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured sheet flashing.

D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products around and leading to rooftop equipment. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.


Section 076200 - 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 076200

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. 2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.





B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of finish for each item. 4. Include pattern of seams and details of termination points, expansion joints and

expansion-joint covers, direction of expansion, roof-penetration flashing, and connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.



B. Product test reports.

C. Sample warranty.


A. Maintenance data.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; 2D (dull, cold rolled) finish.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.


a. Carlisle Residential; a division of Carlisle Construction Materials. b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn. c. Polyguard Products, Inc.

2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher.

3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Solder: 1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by

stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,

buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

G. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

2.6 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Built-in Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, with riveted and soldered joints, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Fabricate expansion joints and accessories from same metal as gutters unless otherwise indicated.

1. Fabricate from the Following Materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

B. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required, with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

C. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape required, complete with outlet tubes. Fabricate from the following materials:


D. Splash Pans: Fabricate to dimensions and shape required and from the following materials:


2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:


B. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:


C. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

D. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings; and form with 2-inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:


B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. 3. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.

Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 4. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel

and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.

5. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for copper.

H. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.3 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.

B. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs. Set in asphalt roofing cement or elastomeric sealant compatible with the substrate.

C. Parapet Scuppers: Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.

D. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall, with elevation of conductor head rim at minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) below scupper discharge.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry." or Section 044200 "Exterior Stone Cladding."

C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Section 077100 - Roof Specialties.

D. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.


Section 077100 - 1 ROOF SPECIALTIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 077100

ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof-edge coping, fascia and gravel stop. 2. Downspouts.


A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. FM Approvals' Listing: Manufacture and install copings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify materials with FM Approvals' markings.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Include the following:

1. Details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

of expansion and contraction. 2. Pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. 3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 4. Details of special conditions.

C. Samples for Verification: For copings made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components including fasteners, accessories and attachments.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for copings.

E. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.



1. Meet with Owner, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roof specialties including installers of roofing materials and accessories.

2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members.

3. Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that will affect roof specialties.


A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof specialties installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Roofing-System Warranty: Roof specialties are included in warranty provisions in Section 075323.

B. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

2.2 EXPOSED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

B. Coil Coated Aluminum Finishes: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Concealed Surface: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5mil.

2.3 CONCEALED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished. Minimum thickness: 0.032”

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finish. Minimum thickness: 0.050”

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.Minimum thickness:0.016”

2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.

D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.6 ROOF-EDGE METALS

A. One-Piece Gravel Stops: Manufactured, one-piece, metal gravel stop in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with a horizontal flange and vertical leg fascia terminating in a drip edge, and concealed splice plates of same material, finish, and shape as gravel stop. Provide matching corner units.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Permatite System 200 Snap-On as manufactured by Metal-Era or comparable product by one of the following:

a. ATAS International, Inc. b. Cheney Flashing Company. c. Hickman Company, W. P. d. MM Systems Corporation. e. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Gravel Stops: Aluminum sheet, 0.040 inchthick.

a. Face Height: As shown on Drawings. Provide manufacturer’s extended face height products where required to meet heights shown on Drawings.

b. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. c. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

3. Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

B. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Metal-Era Perma-Tite series coping, Tapered Coping or comparable product by one of the following:

a. ATAS International, Inc. b. Cheney Flashing Company.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

c. Hickman Company, W. P. d. MM Systems Corporation. e. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Coping-Cap Material: Extruded aluminum, 0.040 inch thick.

a. Face Height: 6 inches or as shown on Drawings. Provide manufacturer’s extended face height products where required to meet heights shown on Drawings.

b. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. c. Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

3. Snap-on-Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 incheswide, with integral cleats.

2.7 ROOF EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEM

A. Downspouts: Corrugated rectangular complete with smooth-curve elbows, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Formed Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. 2. Extruded Aluminum: 0.125 inch thick. 3. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. Color as selected by the Architect.

2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.


A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.

1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum and roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.

1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.4 ROOF-EDGE METAL INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


Section 077200 - 1 ROOF HATCH Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 077200

ROOF HATCH

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent and locations of roof accessories is indicated on the drawings and by provisions of this section.

B. Types of units specified in this section include the following:

1. Roof Hatch 2. Hatch Safety Railing System 3. Roof Edge Protection

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data; Roof Accessories: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, rough-in diagrams, details, installation instructions and general product recommendations.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide manufacturers' standard units, modified as necessary to comply with requirements. Shop fabricate each unit to greatest extent possible.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Zinc-Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent copper, ASTM A 525, G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized.

B. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi-rigid board of glass fiber of thicknesses indicated.

C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with water-borne preservatives for above-ground use, complying with AWPB LP-2; not less than 1-1/2" thick.


MAY 8, 2018

D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened.

1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners affords access to building, provide nonremovable fastener heads.

E. Gaskets: Tubular or fingered design of neoprene or polyvinyl chloride, or block design of sponge neoprene.

F. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494A or SSPC-Paint 12, solvent type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating.

G. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.

H. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer, which is compatible with joint surfaces; comply with FS TT-S-00227E, TT-S-00230C, or TT-S-001543A.

I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic.

2.3 ROOF HATCHES

A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and weathertight perimeter gasketing, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.


a. Babcock-Davis. b. Bilco Company (The). c. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products

Group. d. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. e. O'Keeffe's Inc. f. Precision Ladders, LLC.

2. Manufacturer shall be capable of providing folding aluminum safely railing system specified in Article 2.4.

B. Basis of Design: Bilco Type S-50, 30” x 36”

1. Cover and Frame: 11 gage aluminum, mill finish. 2. Lift assistance: Compression spring operators 3. Curb: Fully welded units, manufacturer's standard height but not less than

12 inches from base flange to top of frame.

a. Fabricate with same material and thickness used for cover top.


MAY 8, 2018

b. Insulation: Fiberglass, minimum 1 inch thick, protected by metal liner of same material and thickness used for inner liner of cover.

4. Weatherstripping seal: Continuous extruded neoprene, EPDM, or vinyl gasket.

2.4 HATCH SAFETY RAILING SYSTEM

A. Provide a folding aluminum safety railing system that collapses when the roof hatch cover is closed.

1. Meet OSHA 29CFR 1910.23 2. Attach to roof hatch, no penetrations of roof membrane permitted 3. Provide 25 year corrosion warranty 4. Provide automatic gate lock system

B. Manufacturer: Provide products complying with requirements of the contract documents and made by one of the following:

1. Babcock-Davis. 2. Bilco Company (The). 3. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. 4. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. 5. O'Keeffe's Inc. 6. Precision Ladders, LLC.

2.5 ROOF EDGE PROTECTION

A. Provide folding free-standing roof edge protection system including pipe railing, uprights, bases, counterweights, and fittings.

B. Basis of Design: KeeGuard Foldshield as manufactured by Kee Safety, Inc. or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, and vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing and flashing; as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly, and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures.

1. Except as otherwise indicated install roof accessory items in accordance with construction details of "NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual".

B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact with noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation.


MAY 8, 2018

C. Flange Seals: Except as otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement, to form a seal.

D. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as component of accessory, install to provide adequate waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counter-flashing). Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings.


Section 079200 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 079200

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section:

1. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior precast concrete walls and partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors

windows and elevator entrances. f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. g. Duct and pipe penetrations as indicated on drawing H502. h. Other joints as indicated.

2. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. c. Other joints as indicated.

3. Exterior joints in the following:

a. Exterior Aluminum Windows. b. Exterior Aluminum Entrances. c. Exterior insulation and finish systems. d. Other joints as indicated.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.

E. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer.

G. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

I. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application.

J. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

K. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.

D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding the commencement of the Work.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.

3. Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.

4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods.

E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints in exterior insulation and finish system joints at locations indicated by Architect.

2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. b. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

5. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

F. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution:

1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections shall receive elastomeric joint sealants.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.


A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS - EXTERIOR

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790 b. GE Advances Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290. d. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Color: As selected by the Architect.

B. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant:

1. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

2. Available Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. c. Tremco; Tremsil 200.

3. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 4. Class: 25. 5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass color anodic aluminum coated with a high-performance coating ceramic tile.

2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Urethane, M, NS, 50, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT

C. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant:


a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II. b. Tremco; Dymeric 511. c. Tremco; Vulkem 922.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 50. 4. Use[s] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) and T (traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum coated with a high-performance coating galvanized steel, brick, ceramic tile and wood.

2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.

B. Available Products:

1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600. 2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 3. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. 4. Tremco; Tremflex 834.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:

1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.


a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. b. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), O (open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Sleeves:

1. Galvanized –Steel –Pipe Sleeve: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B,, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

B. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, Method B, Exposed Surface Finish Hand Pull Tab, Method C, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Flap, or Method D, Water Immersion in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint-sealant application indicated.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.

4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.

5. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces[ <JS-#>].

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints in brick pavers. b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. c. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units. d. Joints in stone paving units, including steps. e. Tile control and expansion joints. f. Joints between different materials listed above. g. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems. e. Joints between metal panels. f. Joints between different materials listed above.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

g. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and louvers.

h. Control and expansion joints in overhead surfaces. i. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 4. Provide sealant for exterior insulation and finish system that has been approved by EIFS

manufacturer.

C. Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

1. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane sealant: 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

D. Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant acid-curing silicone sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry and concrete walls and

partitions. d. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete beams and planks. e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane sealant. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,

windows and elevator entrances.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic Latex sealant. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Interior control, expansion, and isolation joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring. c. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring. d. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 3. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent urethane sealant.


Section 081113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 081113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.



B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.


A. Product test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 3. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

4. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 5. Mesker Door Inc. 6. Pioneer Industries. 7. Premier Products, Inc. 8. Republic Doors and Frames. 9. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand brand.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.

2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0

mm). d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Kraft-paper honeycomb - Mineral board at rated doors.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). b. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent

door frame. c. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with

minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Polyurethane.

3. Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than R-11 when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

4. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.

b. Construction: Full profile welded.

5. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.5 BORROWED LITES

A. Hollow-metal frames of uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm).

B. Construction: Full profile welded.

2.6 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-(9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing

not less than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.7 MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).

I. Glazing: Section 088000 "Glazing."

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm)

from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm)o.c.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation

types indicated.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.

2.10 ACCESSORIES

A. Louvers: Provide sightproof louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel frame.

1. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Movable blades closed by actuating fusible link, and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type and fire-resistance rating indicated.

B. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber

insulation. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

c. At Bottom of Door: [3/4 inch (19.1 mm)] [5/8 inch (15.8 mm)] plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.


Section 081116 - 1 ALUMINUM THERMAL FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 081116

ALUMINUM THERMAL FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Aluminum work.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cross Aluminum Thermal Flush Doors.

B. Thermal Aluminum Door Frames

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 07901: Joint Sealants

B. Section 08710: Door Hardware

C. Section 08800: Glazing

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. System Performance Requirements:

1. Air infiltration: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 283, the air infiltration should not exceed .04 cfm per square foot of fixed area.

2. Water Penetration: No water will pass through the entry system when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at a pressure of 6.24.

3. Sound Transmission Loss: STC rating shall be no lower the 32 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 413. OITC rating shall be 30 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1332.

4. Thermal Performance: U factor of entry system shall be no more than 0.34 when tested with the CTS Method. The condensation resistance factor (CRF) shall be no less than 75 when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503-09.

5. Uniform Load Deflection: Entry system shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 330: 3840 Pa or 80.0 psf positive and negative.

ALUMINUM THERMAL FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES 081116 - 2

6. Uniform Load Structural: Entry system shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 330: 5760 Pa or 120.0 psf positive and negative.

7. Missile Impact: Entry system will pass double impact from large missile; ASTM E 1886.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Refer to Submittal Procedures – Section 01 33 00

B. Product Data: Include manufacturer’s product information, including material, elemental construction, fabrication, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: Include shop drawings relating to dimensions, fabrication, finish and installation. 1. Drawings should include the following:

a. Dimensions b. Elevations with necessary detail keys c. Entry system reinforcements (if applicable) d. Fabrication and Finish

D. Samples: 1. Color: Provide manufacturer’s samples of standard and non-standard finishes. 2. Door: Supply manufacturer’s door sample presenting finish, interior insulation, and

standard reinforcement components.

E. Test Results: Offer any required test results for particular jobs. Accredited test reports will be available upon request.

F. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Provide all necessary instructions for installation including glazing, anchoring, reinforcement (if applicable), and optimum performance installation.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1. Manufacturing process with contemporary inspection using neoteric checklist for

optimum field performance. 2. Manufacturing same product specified for over 30 years.

B. Pre-Installation Meetings: Plan initial pre-installation meetings for job details and regional regulations.


1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING

A. Packing: Finished products shall be packaged securely with appropriate labeling for protection and product identification visible on packaging.

B. Shipping and Handling: Deliver materials to site in original condition and packaging without any damage to packaging or materials.

C. Unloading: Individually packaged products to be unloaded by hand truck or 2-person team lift (or more if needed) to avoid unnecessary damage.

D. Storage and Protection: 1. Store items indoors away from excessive amounts of moisture. 2. Protect entry doors against damage from outdoor hazards and during the entire

installation

E. Waste Management: Refer to contact information apparent on packaging for appropriate recycling opportunities.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warrant doors and frames to be free from defects and premature degradation of finish and door structure.

B. Warranty period will be ten years from the date of manufacture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cross Aluminum Products Inc., Address: 1770 Mayflower Rd., Niles, Michigan 49120. Phone: (800) 806-3667 or (269) 697-8340 Fax: (269) 697-8348 Web: www.crossaluminum.com Email: [email protected]

2.2 THERMAL ALUMINUM FLUSH DOORS


A. Product: FL-400T Series with required aluminum frames.

B. Door Opening Size: Refer to drawings.

C. Door Assembly: 1. Door Stile: To be aluminum alloy 6063; temper to be T5 with a minimum 1/8”

wall thickness. Stiles to be thermally broken using Technoform I-Strut™ in 2 places.

2. Stile Thickness: To be 1 3/4” thick tubular extrusion. 3. Door Joinery: Joinery shall be 3/8” diameter cadmium tie rods bolted through

interlocking stiles. Minimum of 3 tie rods per door (where applicable). 4. Top of Door: To receive added 1/8” reinforcement closer plate adhered to interior

wall for door closer hardware. 5. Top/Bottom of Door: To receive 1/8” thick cap for further seal and to trim the top

and bottom of door.

D. Pattern: 1. Inside Door Face Smooth. 2. Outside Door Face Smooth.

E. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate Rigid Foam

2.3 MATERIALS & ACCESSORIES

A. Aluminum: 1. ASTM B 221, alloy and temper to be 6063 T-5 or similar alloy and temper

recommended by manufacturer for optimum finish results and consistency.

B. Internal Reinforcement: 1. ASTM B 308, for structural aluminum.

C. Fasteners 1. Material: Aluminum, 18-8 Stainless Steel, or other non-corrosive materials

compatible with items being screw applied.

2. Exposed: a. Type: Fasteners exposed will be Philips flathead fasteners unless provided

by other supplier. b. Finish: Fasteners to match appropriate finish on standard doors and frames.

3. Concealed: To be standard according to manufacturer’s standards.


D. Weather stripping: 1. Wool pile:

a. Material: Solid Propylene Base with resilient fibers. b. Color: Manufacturer’s standard black color.

E. Glazing: 1. Door Glazing: Interlocking door glazing to be screw fastened and removable from

interior with NORSEAL® V710 and/or V740 moisture seal foam tape applied to both interior and exterior sides of door. Exterior glazing to be non-removable. a. Material: To be 1/8” thick extruded channels-6063-T5. b. Color: To match finish of door.

2. Frame Glazing: Exterior side Snap-in glazing. Frame gasket to be flush glaze extruded rubber compound; EPDM. a. Material: To be aluminum extruded channels-6063-T5. b. Color: To match finish of frame.

F. Thermal Bar: 1. Thermal I-Strut™: Mechanically attached to thermally break tubular extrusions.

a. Material: To be Polyamide 6.6 with 25% glass fibers. b. Color: Manufacturer’s standard black color.

2.4 HARDWARE

A. Hardware Preparation: To be fabricated at factory according to hardware templates provided.

B. Hardware Installation: To factory install all applicable and supplied hardware to doors and frames.

C. Hardware Reinforcement: To provide necessary reinforcement for proper longevity and hardware function; ASTM B 209 and/or ASTM 308.

D. Hardware types: Refer to Hardware Schedule.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Processes: 1. Job Preparation:

a. Preliminary Analysis: Job drawings to indicate door types, sizes, vision lite configuration(s), and finishes.

b. Fulfill Custom Requirements: Follow through on any specific deviations from standard requirements.

2. Assembly:


a. Product Operation: Measure, cut, and fabricate required materials for designated job.

b. Product Refinement: Smooth rough cut edges. c. Arrangement: Place prepared structural fasteners inside door to conceal from

view. d. Reinforcement Preparation: To apply necessary structural and hardware

reinforcement in beneficial areas of doors and frames where needed.

3. Fitting: a. Placement: Product materials to fit accurately in appropriate locations. b. Alignment: Doors to be in proper alignment with intended elevations.

B. Tolerances: Doors and/or frame elevations will not deviate from last revised and approved drawings.

2.6 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer’s standard aluminum extruded profiles with required thickness for load support. 1. Vertical Jamb Sizes: 2” x 4 1/2” 2. Header Sizes: 2” x 4 1/2”

B. Clips and Reinforcements: Manufacturer’s standard high strength aluminum: ASTM B 221 and/or ASTM B 308.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard non-bleeding and non-corrosive material congruent to adjacent material. 1. Exposed Fasteners: To be stainless steel Philips flathead screws with appropriate

finish: ASME B 18.6.4 2. Concealed Fasteners: To be manufacturer’s standard.

D. Assembly: 1. Framing members are separate aluminum pieces cut to length and mechanically

fastened from either spline or clip systems. 2. Joinery to be hairline. 3. Sommer and Maca Dymonic or Dow Corning® 795 Sealants applied on applicable

areas. 4. Framing elevations to be identified according to final approved drawings.

E. Anchoring: 1. Appropriate anchoring fasteners to be secured no more than 18” apart on entire

frame opening. 2. Frame headers to receive no less than 2 anchoring fasteners.


3. Add extra fasteners where hardware and hinge may require more.

F. Doorstop: 1. To be #CDM-32.

a. Wall Thickness: To be 3/16” thick for receiving applicable hardware. b. Profile Height: To be no less than 5/8” high.

2. Snap-in: Fits standard manufacturer’s door jamb profiles.

3. To receive weather strip around acting door leafs. a. Wool pile: Solid Propylene Base with resilient fibers in a standard black

color.

G. Hardware Preparation: 1. Intramural Work: Hardware preparation according to hardware suppliers’

templates. 2. Field Work: Refer to manufacturers’ installation instructions.

H. Side lites and Transoms: 1. Factory-assembled to largest allowable shipping size. 2. Identified in concealed locations according to final approved elevation numbers.

2.7 GLAZING

A. Reference section Glazing (08800)

B. Door Glass Stops: 1. Profile: 1/8” thick interlocking flush fit screw-applied extruded aluminum-stops

with color matching door finish and removable from interior. Exterior glass stops to be non-removable.

2. Standard vision lite sizes: 8” x 32”

2.8 FINISHES

A. Standard Anodic Finishes: 1. Clear 204 R1: Architectural Class 11, AA-M12C22A31, 0.4 mils. 2. Dark Bronze: Architectural Class 1, AA-M12C22A44, 0.7 mils.

B. Available Anodic Finishes: 1. Clear 215 R1: Architectural Class 1, AA-M12C22A41, 0.7 mils. 2. Champagne: Architectural Class 1, AA-M12C22A44, 0.7 mils. 3. Light Bronze: Architectural Class 1, AA-M12C22A44, 0.7 mils.


4. Medium Bronze: Architectural Class 1, AA-M12C22A44, 0.7 mils. 5. Black: Architectural Class 1, AA-M12C22A44, 0.7 mils.

C. Paint Finishes: 1. 70% Fluoropolymer (PVDF): AAMA 2605, ASCA 96, Kynar 500® or Hylar

5000®. a. Fluropon®: 2 or more coat systems. b. Trinar® Exotic Clear, Trinar® Metallic Clear: 3 coat system. c. Duranar®: 2, 3, or 4-coat systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting proper installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Do not install damaged components.

C. Install doors plumb, level, and square, with no warp or rack in frame.

D. Hang doors with the following required clearances: 1. Lock Stiles: 0.125” 2. Between Meeting Stiles: 0.187”- 0.250” 3. At Top Rails: 0.125” 4. Between Bottom Rail and Threshold: 0.125” - 0.187”

E. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

F. Rigidly secure non movement joints.

G. Install recommended anchors with separators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration.

H. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Glazers to provide necessary glazing shims for proper glass installation on vision lites and side lites. Reference section Glazing Accessories (08 85 00).

J. Place thresholds in proper weather sealant.


3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Fine-tune doors and hinges to operate properly without bind or sag.

B. Adjust pressure settings on closers. 1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-

second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch measured to the leading door edge.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately clean doors after installation.

B. Avoid any harsh cleaners not specified on manufacturer’s cleaning and care guide.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Follow Manufacturer’s guide to cleaning and care for proper treatment on entrances for optimum longevity, function, and performance.

END OF SECTION 0811 16

Section 081416 - 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 081416

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1. Section 083473.16 "Wood Sound Control Door Assemblies" for acoustic flush wood doors.

2. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.


A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Ampco Products, LLC. 3. Chappell Door Co. 4. Eggers Industries. 5. Graham Wood Doors; ASSA ABLOY Group company. 6. Haley Brothers, Inc. 7. Ipik Door Company. 8. Marlite. 9. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 10. Poncraft Door Company. 11. VT Industries Inc.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.

C. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

1. Extra Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

3. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

E. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

F. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde.

2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.

G. Mineral-Core Doors:

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors at locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: Natural birch unless noted otherwise on Door Schedule. 3. Cut: Rotary cut. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Core: Particleboard (Mineral Core at fire rated doors). 8. Construction: Five plies, 1-3/4 inches thick. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then

entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.

2.4 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors at locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option. 3. Core: Particleboard (Mineral Core at fire rated doors). 4. Construction: Five plies, 1-3/4 inches thick. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then

entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.5 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS

A. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.

B. Metal Louvers:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 099123" Interior Painting."

2.8 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.

C. Use only paints and coatings that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 9, UV

curable, acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Open-grain finish. 5. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.


Section 083313 - 1 COILING COUNTER DOORS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 083313

COILING COUNTER DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Counter doors. 2. Fire-rated counter doors.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of coiling counter door and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure.

2. Show locations of controls, locking devices, detectors or replaceable fusible links, and other accessories.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.





A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Temperature-Rise Limit: At exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

2. Smoke Control: In corridors and smoke barriers, provide doors that are listed and labeled with the letter "S" on the fire-rating label by a qualified testing agency for smoke- and draft-control based on testing according to UL 1784; with maximum air-leakage rate of 3.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.01524 cu. m/s x sq. m) of door opening at 0.10-inch wg (24.9 Pa) for both ambient and elevated temperature tests.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Counter Door: Coiling counter door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.


a. Cookson Company. b. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. c. Overhead Door Corporation.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 50,000.

C. Door Curtain Material: Aluminum.

D. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) center-to-center height.

1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal.

E. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, fabricated aluminum extrusion and finished to match door.

F. Curtain Jamb Guides: Aluminum with exposed finish matching curtain slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise.

G. Hood: Match curtain material and finish.

1. Mounting: Face of wall or between jambs, as shown on Drawings.

H. Sill Configuration: No sill.

I. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly.

1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side locking bars, operable from inside with thumb turn.

J. Manual Door Operator: Manufacturer's standard crank operator.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

K. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 25 cycles per hour and up to 90 cycles per day.

2. Motor Exposure: Interior. 3. Emergency Manual Operation: Crank type. 4. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic continuously monitored wireless sensor edge

on bottom bar. 5. Control Station(s): Where shown on Drawings. 6. Control Type: Key switch control.

L. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with smoke seals, astragal, and automatic closing device as required.

M. Door Finish:

1. Aluminum Finish: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.

2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face.

2.2 FIRE-RATED COUNTER DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Fire-Rated Counter Door: Overhead fire-rated coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.


a. Cookson Company. b. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. c. Overhead Door Corporation.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 50,000.

C. Fire Rating: As indicated on drawings and with smoke control.

D. Door Curtain Material: Stainless steel.

E. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) center-to-center height.

1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal.

F. Curtain Jamb Guides: Stainless steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.

G. Hood: Match curtain material and finish.

1. Mounting: Face of wall or between jambs, as shown on Drawings.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

H. Sill Configuration: No sill or Fire-rated, laminate counter as indicated on drawings.

I. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly.

1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side locking bars, operable from inside with thumbturn.

J. Manual Door Operator: Manufacturer's standard crank operator.

K. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 25 cycles per hour and up to 90 cycles per day.

2. Motor Exposure: Interior. 3. Emergency Manual Operation: Crank type. 4. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic continuously monitored wireless sensor edge

on bottom bar. 5. Control Station(s): Where shown on Drawings. 6. Control Type: Key switch control.

L. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with smoke seals, automatic closing device, astragal and automatic closing device.

M. Door Finish:

1. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 4 (polished directional satin). 2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.4 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate coiling counter-door curtain of interlocking metal slats in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:

1. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84 or UL 723. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces.

2. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face.

B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.

2.5 HOODS

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

1. Include automatic drop baffle on fire-rated doors to guard against passage of smoke or flame.

2.6 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.

1. Lock Cylinders: Cylinders specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware" and keyed to building keying system.

2. Keys: Three for each cylinder.

B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.

2.7 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES

A. Smoke Seals: Equip each fire-rated door with replaceable smoke-seal perimeter gaskets or brushes for smoke and draft control as required for door listing and labeling by a qualified testing agency.

B. Astragal: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.

C. Automatic-Closing Device: Equip each fire-rated door with an automatic-closing device or holder-release mechanism and governor unit complying with NFPA 80 and an easily tested and reset release mechanism. Automatic-closing device shall be designed for activation by the following:

1. Replaceable fusible links with temperature rise and melting point of 165 deg F (74 deg C)interconnected and mounted on both sides of door opening.

2. Manufacturer's standard UL-labeled smoke detector and door-holder-release devices. 3. Manufacturer's standard UL-labeled heat detector and door-holder-release devices. 4. Building fire-detection, smoke-detection, and -alarm systems.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.8 COUNTER DOOR ACCESSORIES

A. Fire-Rated, Laminate Counter: Fire-door manufacturer's high-pressure decorative laminate-covered countertop, UL or ITS tested and labeled for 1-1/2-hour fire rating for approved use with fire-door assembly.

2.9 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.

2.10 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer.

B. Crank Operator: Consisting of crank and crank gearbox, steel crank drive shaft, and gear-reduction unit, of type indicated. Size gears to require not more than 25-lbf (111-N) force to turn crank. Fabricate gearbox to be oil tight and to completely enclose operating mechanism. Provide manufacturer's standard crank-locking device.

2.11 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.

1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with

NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated.

1. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Phase: As required by door manufacturer. b. Volts: As required by door manufacturer.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

c. Hertz: 60.

2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec.(203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

3. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

D. Obstruction Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. For fire-rated doors, activation delays closing.

1. Wireless Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device.

E. Control Station: Key control station in fixed location with controls labeled "Open" and "Stop".

1. Type: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

F. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf (111 N).

G. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

H. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install coiling counter doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B. Fire-Rated Doors: Install according to NFPA 80.

C. Smoke-Control Doors: Install according to NFPA 80 and NFPA 105.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain coiling counter doors.


Section 084113 - 1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT AND ENTRANCES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 084113

ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT AND ENTRANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior and interior storefront framing and entrance doors.

2. Applications: a. Interior Storefront; Trifab™ VG 451 Framing System – 2" x 4-1/2" nominal

dimension; Non-Thermal; Front, Center, Back, Multi-Plane, Weatherseal Glazed (Type B); Screw Spline, Fabrication.

b. Trifab™ VG 451T Framing System – 2" x 4-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal; Front, Center, Back, Multi-Plane, Structural Silicone Glazed; Screw Spline, Fabrication.

c. Trifab™ VG 451T Framing System – 2" x 4-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal; Front, Center, Back, Multi-Plane, Weatherseal Glazed; Screw Spline, Fabrication.


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:

1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements to glazing. d. Glazing-to-glazing contact. e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

g. Sealant failure. h. Failure of operating units.

B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria.

C. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch.

D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.

E. Story Drift: Provide aluminum-framed systems that accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories indicated.

1. Test Performance: Meet criteria for passing, based on building occupancy type, when tested according to AAMA 501.4 at design displacement and 1.5 times design displacement.

F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

2. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 12 lbf/sq. ft.

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-framed systems or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes.

I. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,

anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.

3. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.

J. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

K. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.40 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503.

L. Sound Transmission: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having the following sound-transmission characteristics:

1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): Minimum 26 OITC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-framed systems.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior.

2. Include details of ballistic glazing.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. 6. Structural sealant glazed intersection.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems including entrance doors. 2. Include design calculations.

G. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.

H. Welding certificates.

I. Entrance Door hardware schedule.

J. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

K. Field quality-control reports.

L. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.

M. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.

D. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401, “Guide for Structural Sealant Glazing” for design and installation of structural-sealant-glazed systems.

E. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Trifab 451T inside glazed or comparable product by one of the following:

1. EFCO Corporation 2. Graham Architectural Products 3. YKK AP America Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Structural sealant glazed four sides. 3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing

system.

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

E. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.018-inchthick stainless steel, ASTM A 240 of type recommended by manufacturer.

F. Subsill with End Dams: Provide manufacturer’s standard subsill with end dams.

G. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated, and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width.

a. Doors shall be equipped with 10-inch bottoms rails to comply with handicap code.

b. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above floor or ground plane.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

2.5 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing”.

B. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows: 1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, single-component neutral-curing silicone formulation

that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems indicated. a. Color: Black

C. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

D. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

E. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture

migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.

F. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system.

G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.8 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in door Hardware Schedule on the Drawings. Entrance door hardware shall be by aluminum door manufacturer.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

1. Color: Dark bronze as approved by Architect from Samples for Initial Selection.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate structural-sealant-glazed systems.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.

F. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.

2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8

mm).

B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm).


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements.

1. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m), of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).

2. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure difference specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa), and shall not evidence water penetration.

3. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, perform quantity of tests in areas indicated on Drawings. Tests shall be conducted according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.


Section 087100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 087100

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors. c. Folding doors.

2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware.



B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware.


D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents.

b. Content: Include the following information:

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame.

2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule.

3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.

4) Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks.


A. Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.

D. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

F. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the DOJ's 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design and ICC A117.1 for door hardware on doors in an accessible route.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).

2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door.

b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

4. Closers: Adjust door and gate closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the time required to move the door to a position of 12 degrees from the latch is 5 seconds minimum.

5. Spring Hinges: Adjust door and gate spring hinges so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the time required to move the door to the closed position is 1.5 seconds minimum.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Electromagnetic and Delayed-Egress Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled on Drawings to comply with requirements in this Section.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. Except as otherwise indicated, products of equivalent quality, design, and function by other manufactures may be used, subject to approval of Architect.

2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.

2. References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations and requirements for description, quality, and function.

2.2 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1.



Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

a. Hager Companies. b. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2. Type:

a. Pins: Stainless steel, except steel pins with steel hinges. Non-removable for exterior and public interior exposure. Non-rising for non-security exposure. Flat bottom with matching plugs.

b. Ball-Bearing: Swaged, inner leaf beveled, square corners. c. Plain-Bearing: Inner leaf beveled, round corners. Except provide ball-bearing for

doors equipped with closers.

2.3 SELF-CLOSING HINGES AND PIVOTS

A. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: BHMA A156.17.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Hager Companies.

2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum

framing. 4. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles. 5. Dust-proof strikes for foot bolts.

B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.


a. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. PDQ Manufacturing.

2.5 AUXILIARY LOCKS

A. Bored Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5: Grade [1] [2]; with strike that suits frame.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


a. PDQ Manufacturing. b. Schlage; an Ingersoll-Rand brand. c. Yale Security Inc; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

B. Push-Button Combination Locks: BHMA A156.5; cylindrical; Grade 1; lock opens by entering a three- to six-digit code by pushing correct buttons in correct sequence; automatically relocks when door is closed; with strike that suits frame.


a. Schlage; an Ingersoll-Rand brand.

2.6 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS

A. Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA A156.23; electrically powered; with electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door; full-exterior or full-interior type, as required by application indicated.


a. Door Controls International, Inc. b. Schlage; an Ingersoll-Rand brand.

2.7 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS

A. Exit Locks and Alarms: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1.


a. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.

2.8 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS

A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw; designed for mortising into door edge.


a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.9 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS

A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.


a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. DORMA Architectural Hardware; a division of DORMA Group North America. c. Dor-O-Matic, an Ingersoll-Rand brand. d. Precision Hardware, Inc.; a Stanley company.

2.10 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.

1. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices.


a. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. PDQ Manufacturing.

3. Cylinders:

a. 6 Pin tumbler cylinders b. Small format interchangeable core c. Verify with owner that manufacturer of cylinder for locksets is acceptable. For

renovation projects – match existing manufacturer of cylinders or replace all existing to match new.

B. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.

2.11 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.

1. No Master Key System: Only change keys operate cylinder. 2. Master Key System: Change keys and a master key operate cylinders. 3. Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, and a grand master key operate

cylinders. 4. Great-Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, a grand master key, and a

great-grand master key operate cylinders. 5. Existing System:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. b. Re-key Owner's existing master key system into new keying system.

6. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:

a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner.

2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:

a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. c. Grand Master Keys: Five. d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five.

2.12 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.5; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks.


a. American Key Boxes and Cabinets. b. Lund Equipment Co., Inc.

2. Multiple-Drawer Cabinet: Cabinet with drawers equipped with key-holding panels and key envelope storage, and progressive-type ball-bearing suspension slides. Include single cylinder lock to lock all drawers.

3. Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock.

4. Portable Cabinet: Tray for mounting in file cabinet, equipped with key-holding panels, envelopes, and cross-index system.

2.13 OPERATING TRIM

A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; Finish to match hardware, if no exact match, use stainless steel.


a. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.14 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS

A. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable safety release.

B. Carry-Open Bars: BHMA A156.3; prevent the inactive leaf from opening before the active leaf; provide polished brass or bronze carry-open bars with strike plate for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used.

C. Astragals: BHMA A156.22.

2.15 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.


a. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. LCN; an Ingersoll-Rand brand.

2.16 CONCEALED CLOSERS

A. Concealed Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.



2.17 CLOSER HOLDER RELEASE DEVICES

A. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA A156.15; Grade 1; closer connected with separate or integral releasing and fire- or smoke-detecting devices. Door shall become self-closing on interruption of signal to release device. Automatic release is activated by smoke detection system.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018



2.18 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; Finish to match hardware, if no exact match, use aluminum. Provide gray rubber exposed resilient parts.


a. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2. Provide wall mounted door stops as standard. Provide floor mounted stops when wall mounted stops are not feasible.

2.19 ELECTROMAGNETIC STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A156.15, Grade 1; wall-mounted electromagnetic single unit with strike plate attached to swinging door; coordinated with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm system for labeled fire-rated door assemblies.


a. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.20 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8.


a. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand brand. b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.

2.21 DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co.

2.22 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.


a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co.

2.23 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE

A. Sliding Door Hardware: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.


a. Hager Companies. b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.24 FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: BHMA A156.14; complete sets including overhead rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.


a. Hager Companies. b. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

2.25 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.


a. Ives; an Ingersoll Rand brand.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.26 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE

A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16.


a. Hager Companies. b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

2.27 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Fire-Rated Applications:

a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:

1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws for wood doors and frames.

2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames.

b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:

1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors and frames. 3) Surface-mounted exit devices.

3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 4. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended

Fasteners for Wood Doors." 5. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and

elsewhere as indicated.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.28 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in finish schedule.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."

C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Wood Flush Doors."

D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

E. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

F. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying schedule. 2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

G. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

H. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect.

1. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware.

I. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

J. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

K. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

L. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

M. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

N. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.


A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. See drawings for Door Hardware Schedule.


Section 088000 - 1 GLAZING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 088000

GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Storefront framing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.

D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use, which are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use, which is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements:

a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated, but not less than wind loads applicable to Project as required by ASCE 7 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.0 "Wind Loads."

b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1,000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.

1) Load Duration: 3 seconds.

c. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4 edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less.

1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass. 3) For laminated glass lites.

d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. e. Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for

each tint color indicated throughout Project.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick and a

nominal 1/2 inch wide interspace. 3. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program

for the following methodologies: a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F. b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.

E. Security Glass Performance: Installed security glass shall withstand security-related loads and forces without damage to the glass beyond that allowed by referenced standards.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: For each glass product, film material and glazing material indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: Showing design and pattern location for each glass unit. Include the following:

1. Glazing method. 2. Size and location of penetrations.

D. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12 inch (300 mm) square Samples for glass and of 12 inch (300 mm) long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

1. Each color of tinted float glass. 2. Ceramic-coated spandrel glass. 3. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. 4. For each color (except black) of exposed glazing sealant indicated.

E. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

1. For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer.

G. Qualification Data: For installers and security glazing testing agency.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

H. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.

I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.

C. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.

1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

D. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period.

1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.

E. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants:

1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.

5. Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, glazing materials matching those submitted.

F. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency or manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer’s name.

a. Permanent mark shall be acid etched, sand blasted, ceramic fired, laser etched, embossed, or of a type that once applied, cannot be removed without being destroyed.

b. Multilite glazed assemblies having individual lights not exceeding 1 sq. ft. (0.09 sq. m) in exposed areas shall have at least one light in the assembly marked as indicated. Other lites in the assembly shall be marked “CPSC 16 CFR 1201”.

c. Fully tempered safety spandrel glass is permitted to be identified by the manufacturer with a removable paper designation.

2. Lites more than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) in area and lites of any area in certain hazardous locations such as sliding glass doors, doors and enclosures for bathtubs, showers, hot tubs, whirlpools, saunas, and steam rooms are required to be Category II materials.

3. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publication: “Glazing Manual”. 2. GANA Publication: “Sealant Manual”. 3. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for

Sealed Insulating Glass Units”.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Retain packaging and sequencing numbers for glass units.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.


C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.2 GLAZING UNITS

A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated

glass). 5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-

strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated or, if not indicated, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Insulating-Glass, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements as follows:

1. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for

insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.

3. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:

a. Manufacturer's standard sealants.

4. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

5. Solar-Control (Tinted) Low-E Insulating-Glass

a. Basis-of-Design: Solarban 90 (2) Optigray + clear; Vitro PPG. b. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 and 6.0 mm. c. Interspace Content: Air or inert gas as standard with manufacturer.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

d. Outdoor Lite: Class 2 (tinted). Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass.

1) Tint Color: Gray.

e. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass. f. Visible Light Transmittance: 36 percent minimum. g. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. h. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.20 maximum. i. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 8 percent maximum.

6. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Insulating-Glass:

a. Construction: Provide units that comply with requirements specified for insulating-glass units except for indoor lite.

b. Indoor Lite: Monolithic ceramic-coated spandrel glass.

1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

c. Kind FT (fully tempered). d. Coating Location: Fourth surface. e. Products: Approved product of Vitro PPG or equal.

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 4. Any material indicated above.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. EPDM. 2. Silicone. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 4. Any material indicated above.

2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants of proven compatibility with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants:

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1) 790, Dow Corning Corporation 800-248-2481 www.dowcorning.com2) SilPruf LM SCS2700, GE 877-943-7325 www.siliconeforbuilding.com3) Spectrem 1 (Basic), Tremco Incorporated 800-852-9068 www.tremco.com

b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 100/50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing

substrates indicated, O.

1) Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass; color anodic aluminum; aluminum coated with a high-performance coating; galvanized steel; and wood.

2. Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants:

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1) 795, Dow Corning Corporation 800-248-2481 www.dowcorning.com2) UltraPruf II SCS2900, GE 877-943-7325 www.siliconeforbuilding.com3) 895, Pecora Corporation 800-523-6688 www.pecora.com

b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing

substrates indicated, O.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1) Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass; color anodic aluminum; aluminum coated with a high-performance coating; galvanized steel; and wood.

C. Class 25 Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

a. 799, Dow Corning Corporation 800-248-2481 www.dowcorning.comb. UltraGlaze SSG4000, GE 877-943-7325 www.siliconeforbuilding.comc. Proglaze SF, Tremco Incorporated 800-852-9068 www.tremco.com

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates

indicated, O.

a. Use O Glazing Substrates Coated glass; color anodic aluminum; aluminum coated with a high-performance coating; galvanized steel; and wood.

2.5 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. Type 1: For glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2: For glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of

liquid sealant.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate glass units and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for the Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bit complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standards.

B. Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt-glazed lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.



Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as follows:

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.


Section 092113 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 092113

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Shaft enclosures.

2. Chase enclosures.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 9 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for applying and finishing panels in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.


A. Structural Performance:

1. Provide gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies capable of withstanding the full air-pressure loads indicated for maximum heights of partitions without failing and while maintaining an airtight and smoke-tight seal. Evidence of failure includes deflections exceeding limits indicated, bending stresses causing studs to break or to distort, and end-reaction shear causing track (runners) to bend or to shear and studs to become crippled.

2. Provide gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies for horizontal duct enclosures capable of spanning distances indicated within deflection limits indicated.

3. Air-pressure loads and deflection limits are specified in "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall" articles in Part 2.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Fire-Test-Response Reports: From a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency substantiating each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly's required fire-resistance rating.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that substantiate required fire-resistance rating for each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly.

D. Acoustical-Test-Response Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency substantiating required STC rating for each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly.


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "FireResistance Directory.”

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies indicated to have STC ratings, provide assembly materials and construction complying with requirements of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat on leveled supports off the ground to prevent sagging.


A. Comply with requirements for environmental conditions, room temperatures, and ventilation specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies is based on products named in Part 2 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall" articles. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. G-P Gypsum Corp.

2. National Gypsum Company.

3. United States Gypsum Co.

2.2 ASSEMBLY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated.

1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints.

2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Framing: ASTM C 645.

1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G40, hot-dip galvanized coating.

C. Gypsum Liner Panels: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels in 1-inch thickness and with moisture-resistant paper faces.

D. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, core type as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

1. Edges: Tapered

E. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9, in manufacturer's standard thickness, but at least 1/2inch thick if in restrooms or glazed tile walls..

F. Accessories: Corner bead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies" that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.

G. Gypsum Wallboard Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475 and as specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies."

H. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

I. Track (Runner) Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: Where indicated, provide expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by shaft-wall assemblies, as determined by testing conducted by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM E 488.

J. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

K. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665 for Type I, unfaced mineral-fiber-blanket insulation produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool.

2.3 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL

A. Intermittent or Sustained Air-Pressure Loads: 10 lbf/sq. ft.

B. Deflection Limit: L/240.

C. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members and corner and end members and for fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

1. Depth: As indicated, or as required for total loads.

2. Ceilings to be designed for 30#/sq.ft. minimum total load with L/240 deflection maximum.

3. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thicknesses that comply with structural performance requirements for stud depth indicated.

D. Track (Runner): Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches, in depth matching studs.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thicknesses that comply with structural performance requirements for stud depth indicated.

E. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in depth matching studs, and not less than 0.0341 inch thick.

F. Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board or Cementitious backer units.

G. Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated

H. Fire Rating: One-hour and two-hour rated assemblies as indicated on Drawings.

I. Cavity Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present, including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast-in anchors, and


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following:

1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing.

2. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies" for applying and finishing panels.

B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of joints with furring and other support.

C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing.

1. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.0312-inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 face-layer panel.

D. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies by locating cavity of assemblies where required to enclose rods.

E. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.

F. Isolate gypsum finish panels from building structure to prevent cracking of finish panels while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.

G. Install control joints to maintain fire-resistance rating of assemblies.

H. In acoustical walls, seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with manufacturer's written instructions or ASTM C 919, whichever is more stringent.



Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Section 092216 - 1 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 092216

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.




A. Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks from ICC-ES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G60 hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm; unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:

1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. 3) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.


a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System. b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-)

thick, galvanized steel.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm). 2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).

H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-

mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

J. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches.

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.


a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

E. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.


Section 092900 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 092900

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.



B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated.

C. Data indicating compliance with specified STC rating.


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELS, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 1396; as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. G-P Gypsum. b. National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.

B. Provide Type X, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board; for use before building is entirely enclosed: ASTM C 1396. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3. Latex Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834 and the following requirements:

a. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E90.

b. Product has flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E84.

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."\

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Installation of paper faced panels shall not begin until areas receiving panels is conditioned space.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

C. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

D. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

E. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

G. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

H. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: At all locations unless otherwise indicated to receive tile backing panels or moisture resistant panels.

2. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.

2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


Section 093000 - 1 TILING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 093000

TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes porcelain tile units. Provide complete systems including leveling, waterproofing, setting materials, grout, sealants, etc and provide fully functional floor and wall finish systems.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI A10.20, Safety Requirements For Ceramic Tile, Terrazzo And Marble Work.

B. ANSI A108.01 through 17, a Series addressing the Installation Of Ceramic Tile.

C. ANSI A118.1 through 12, Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar thru Crack Isolation Membranes For Thin-Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installations.

D. ASTM C 144, Aggregate For Masonry Mortar.

E. ASTM C 150, Portland Cement.

F. ASTM C 206, Finishing Hydrated Lime.

G. ASTM C 207, Hydrated Lime For Masonry Purposes.

H. ASTM C 920, Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

I. ASTM C 1288, Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Interior Substrate Sheets.

J. ASTM C 1325, Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement Interior Substrate Sheets.

K. 40 CFR, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards For Architectural Coatings.

L. GA GA-230, Vapor Retarders Over Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.

M. TCA, Handbook For Ceramic Tile Installation.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


A. Applications: Tiles being employed in floor, exterior and/or wet area applications must be so certified by the tile manufacturer for each of these uses.

B. Wet Areas: Do not provide mounted tile assemblies for these uses unless the tile manufacturer certifies that the mounting is suitable for the specified installation and can document a history of successful and appropriate in-service performance.

C. Factory Blending: Tile exhibiting color variations within the range(s) selected, are to be blended in the factory so that units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from any other package.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide for all materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings accurately depicting the areas being tiled; include field measurements. Locate each expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in the substrates; record the width of each joint. Layout tile patterns, coursing and expansion joints; demonstrate how the recorded substrate joints are being addressed within the tile work.

C. Samples: Provide full size samples of each tile, trim, accessory and grout being provide; repeat for each color being provided. Products demonstrating color and texture variations, are to be submitted in sets showing the full range of variations that can be expected.

D. Certification: Provide the manufacturer's certification(s) relative to the use of its products in floor and/or wet areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI A108.02

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Refer to the Finish Plans and Legend for material/product selections.

B. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated

2.3 TRIM UNITS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide trim that is made by the field tile manufacture intended to match in design, color, coursing and the other characteristics of the adjoining tiles.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. When indicated or required by the nature of the tile/installation, provide special non-tile trim. 1. Transitions: Provide Schluter Reno at transitions with other materials. Select the

appropriate Reno model for each specific application.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: Comply with ASTM C 150, type 1.

B. Sand: Comply with ASTM C 144.

C. Lime: Comply with ASTM C 206 or ASTM C 207, both type S.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Mix of portland cement, sand and a latex additive. Comply with ANSI A118.4, providing a nonsagging mix for walls.

2.5 GROUTING MATERIAL

A. Water cleanable epoxy complying with ANSI A118.3. Provide VOC content no greater than 65 g/L when calculated per 40 CFR, part 59, subpart D (EPA method 24).

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide epoxy grout at all tile installations.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Provide chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 as referenced by Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. Limit the VOC content to no more than 250 g/L when calculated per 40 CFR, part 59, subpart D (EPA method 24). Include the primers, backer rods, and accessories recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

B. Nontraffic Areas: Provide a mildew resistant, silicone of type S; grade NS; class 25; uses NT, G, A, and as applicable to nonporous joint substrates, O; formulated with fungicide. Must be designed for sealing joints in nonporpus substrates that are subject to in-service exposures to high humidity and temperature extremes.

C. Traffic Areas: Provide a multipart, urethane of type M; grade P; class 25; uses T, M, A, and as applicable to joint substrates, O. Include a Shore A hardness of 35.


A. Backer Units: Refer to Division 9 Section 092900 for tile backer panels.

B. Underlayments And Patching Compounds: Provide products/formulations approved by the setting materials manufacturer.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Waterproofing for thin-set tile installation: Comply with ANSI A118.10. Provide a fabric-reinforced, fluid-applied system consisting of liquid-latex rubber and fabric reinforcement. System shall contain preformed fiberglass mesh coving, inside and outside corners, drain fittings, and preformed expansion joint flashing.

D. Thin Bed Base And Crack Isolation Sheet: Comply with ANSI A118.12. Provide Schulter Ditra at thin bed floor applications, and at cracked/dimensionally unstable substrates.

E. Cleaners: Provide a neutral product capable of removing soil and residue without harming the surfaces. Must be approved by both the tile and the grout manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Scope: Measure each surface being tiled. Compare actual dimensions to both those indicated on the contract documents and those on the shop drawings. Review conflicts with the architect prior to proceeding.

1. Wainscots: Include a bullnosed top course. If indicated dimensions do not end on a full tile, extend the height to the next full tile. Contact the architect for clarification prior to proceeding.

B. Moisture: Prior to the start of the tile work, review the nature of the substrate and the intended use of the tile application; applications that will be subject to wetting are limited to substrates of concrete, masonry, cured portland cement mortar, or cementitious backer units. Provide cementitious backing when one of these substrates is not present.

C. Substrate: Inspect; make flat, sound, dry, clean and free of incompatible coatings. Remove oil, waxy/soapy films and curing compounds. Coordinate the location of the substrate joints with that of the tile layout. Comply with GA-230 regarding vapor retarders.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. ANSI And TCA Reference Standards: Review the requirements of the product(s), application(s), and installation method(s) being employed. Provide the necessary adjustments/materials to ensure compliance with these standards.

B. Level, Slope, Placement, Deflection, Variation and Finish of Substrate: Coordinate with the substrate provider. Prior to the start of the tile work, provide the necessary adjustments to the substrate (as to level, slope, finish, deflection limit, variation tolerance and elevation) to ensure proper placement and the intended performance. Comply with ANSI A108.01 regarding flatness and concrete substrate finish.

1. Concrete And Masonry Substrates: Must be sound, crack-free, and dimensionally stable. Substrates that are smooth, dusty, painted, effloresced, coated with form release


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

compounds, or have loose surface material are to be bush-hammered or heavily sandblasted; provide an uncontaminated and properly scarified substrate.

2. Concrete: Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with patching compound. Areas containing a limited amount of cracking are to be further renovated by providing a crack isolation sheet. Areas being so renovated are to be reviewed for acceptability by the isolation sheet manufacturer prior to beginning the work.

C. Tile Pretreatment: Verify that tile is pretreated as necessary.

1. Blending: Verify that tile exhibiting color variations (within the ranges selected) has been blended in the factory. Blending to ensure that units taken from one package will show the same range as those taken from any other package. Blending of tiles at the project site is prohibited.

3.3 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow waterproofing to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or setting materials over it.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. ANSI Reference Standards: Comply with A10.20 and the specific A108 standard(s) that apply to the type of tile/setting/grouting materials employed and the method required.

1. Provide 95% mortar coverage for the following: wet areas, 8 inches by 8 inches and larger tiles, and rib-backed tiles.

B. TCA Reference Standard: Comply with the indicated methods.

C. Full And Total Extent: Provide tile into recesses and under/behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting the pattern or joint alignments. Form intersections and returns accurately. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, etc.

D. Thin Bed Floor Applications: Provide the base sheet.

E. Cutting And Drilling: Perform without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind the cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, built-in items, etc. Provide straight joints/lines.

1. Cuts to occur only on the outer edges of the field, and no cut to produce less than a half size unit.

F. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a grid pattern. Align joints when adjacent tiles/trim are the same size. Unless otherwise indicated, for each wall or floor space center the tile fields in both directions, adjusting to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

joint widths and flush adjacencies, unless otherwise shown. Make adjustments prior to initial set.

1. Lippage and misaligned units are defects and are to be replaced.

G. Movement Joints: Provide (expansion, control, contraction, cold/construction, seismic, isolation, etc) joints as may be indicated on the drawings but never less (location and size) than that needed to comply with the TCA referenced standard; include a metal edge component when indicated. For nonindicated locations, follow these guidelines and submit the proposed locations for review prior to proceeding. Installation must occur simultaneously with that of the setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after tile installation.

1. Interior Areas: Provide within the range of 24 to 36 feet oc, in each direction. Areas exposed to direct sunlight or moisture, provide at 8 to 12 feet oc.

2. Restraining Items: Provide where tile abuts walls, ceilings, curbs, dissimilar materials, columns, pipes, etc.

3. Substrates: Provide at changes of substrate material, changes of backing materials, at cold joints, and above movement joints in the substrate. Joints to not be narrower than the joint in the substrate below.

a. Joint Shift: Limited shift in the tile joint from that of the substrate joint can be accomplished by employing the crack isolation sheet. Refer to the cracked concrete requirements.

H. Sealant: Tile edges adjacent to sealant applications are to be sanded/ground. Provide primer as required by the sealant manufacturer. Provide flexible backup strips as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

I. Curing: Provide no less than a 5 day damp cure for indicated installations in the TCA reference standard.

3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.

1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.

a. Tile floors in wet areas.

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:

1. 1/8 inch.

C. Interiors: Comply with TCA method F113 & F115 using epoxy grout.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.6 REPAIR, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Replace pitted, chipped, cracked, scratched, misaligned, etc units.

B. Traffic: Prohibit traffic from floors for a minimum of 7 days after the grouting is complete.

C. Cleaning: Clean tile surfaces ten days prior to substantial completion. Employ a cleaner that will not adversely affect the sealer.


Section 095113 - 1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 095113

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating acoustical panel ceiling installation with hanger attachment to building structure and all ceiling mounted items:

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.

D. Product test reports.

E. Research/evaluation reports.

F. Maintenance data.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP for testing indicated.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0

percent of quantity installed.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Products specified herein are those of Armstrong World Industries. Equal products of US Gypsum may be submitted for review.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Acoustical Panel; Cirrus High NRC Item No. 551

1. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows: a. Type and Form: Type III, Form 1 Pattern E. b. Color: White. c. LR: Not less than 0.85. d. CAC: Not less than 35. e. Edge/Joint Detail: Angled tegular. f. Thickness: 7/8 inch. g. Tile Size: 24 by 48 inches. h. Grid System: Prelude 15/16” grid or equal


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Acoustical Panel; Calla Item No. 2821

1. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows: a. Type and Form: Type IV, Form 2 Pattern E. b. Color: Black. c. LR: Not less than 0.86. d. CAC: Not less than 35. e. Edge/Joint Detail: Square Lay-In. f. Thickness: 1 inch. g. Tile Size: 24 by 48 inches. h. Grid System: Prelude 15/16” grid or equal

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

a. Type: Postinstalled expansion or postinstalled bonded anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,

Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch-diameter wire.

D. Hanger Rods, Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Armstrong or comparable product by the following:

1. USG Corporation 2. CertainTeed


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 4. Cap Finish: Painted white with the following exception:

a. ACT-2 shall be painted Black.

C. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 9/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel. 4. Cap Finish: Painted white.

2.7 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:

a. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919. c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. 2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,

synthetic-rubber sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders.

C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs.

2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends,


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.


Section 095126 - 1 WOOD PANEL CEILING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 095126

WOOD PANEL CEILING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Project Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.4 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wood panels and suspension systems for interior ceilings.





B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Product test reports.

C. Research reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.




Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD CEILING PANELS

A. Wood Ceiling Panel Type: 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with project requirements, the design is based on

the following: USG Interiors, LLC, “USG True® Wood Panels”. 2. Classification: Provide ceiling panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form and

pattern as follows: a. Type: XX composite wood panel, Perforation and cut pattern as selected by the

Architect. b. Pattern: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s full range, natural

variation in grain and color. c. Color: Walnut.

3. Surface Burning ASTM E84: a. Material Classification: Class A. b. Flame spread: 25 of less. c. Smoke Developed: 50 or less.

4. Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products ASTM E1264: Panel type: Composite, Class A Fire Performance.

5. LR: Not less than Flat White 050 without perforations 0.8. 6. NRC: Not less than 0.60. 7. Edge/Joint Detail: As selected by the Architect. 8. Suspension Grid Width: As selected by the Architect.9. Panel Depth: 3/4 inch. 10. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings. 11. Required accessories: Reinforcement Angle for all panels 4’-0” (1219 mm) and longer. 12. Panel Warranty: 1-year USG Specialty Systems Warranty, reference USG SC2102

B. Accessories. 1. Molding; provide manufacturer’s prepainted steel molding as selected by the Architect. 2. Edge Trim

a. True Wood Trim or USG Compasso; refer to the Drawings. 3. PFB Panel Fixing Bracket 4. WDRC Wood Panel Retention Clip

C. Suspension System Attachment devices. 1. Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel; soft temper; pre-stretched; yield stress load at least

three times the design load but not less than 12-gauge. a. Spacing and gauge per IBC, UL and CISCA design. b. Supplied and installed by ceilings subcontractor.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of wood panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated.

B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install ceilings according to ASTM C636/C636M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of panels. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. 2. Arrange directionally patterned panels as follows:

a. As indicated on approved shop drawings.


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform inspections.

1. Periodic inspection during the installation of suspended ceiling grids according to ASCE/SEI 7.


Section 096513 - 1 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 096513

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.

2. Resilient stair treads, risers and landing tile.



B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.

C. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE

A. Product: Refer to the Interior Materials Chart on the Drawings.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style:

a. Coved (base with toe) - used with resilient flooring. b. Style: Straight (flat or toeless) – used with carpet.

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 4 inches.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed.

H. Colors and Patterns: Refer to the Finish Legend.

2.2 RUBBER STAIR ACCESSORIES: (ST1)

A. Rubber Stair Treads:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by:


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

a. Johnsonite.

B. Rubber Stair Treads Standard: ASTM F 2169.

1. Material Requirement: Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 2. Surface Design: Roundel Artisan Collection

a. Hammered Surface, Square Nose Configuration, Integrated Riser, 2 inch Color Grit Tape Insert / Visually Impaired (VIHTR).

C. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece.

D. Integral Risers: Smooth, Flat: in height that fully cover substrate.

E. Landing Tile: Matching treads; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads.

F. Color: Refer to Finish Legend.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces following manufacturer’s written recommendations.

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.


Section 096519 - 1 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 096519

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl composition floor tile.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

D. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.

B. Field moisture test reports


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for floor tile including resilient base and accessories.

a. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE

A. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 1, solid color.

B. Wearing Surface: Smooth.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Size: 12 by 12 inches.

E. Manufacturer, Colors and Patterns: Refer to the Interior Materials Chart.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. Coordinate need for polish with Owner’s facility maintenance director.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb ofwater/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles in pattern to match existing.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.


Section 104416 - 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 104416

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.

B. Related Section: Section 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS




A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.


a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division. c. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated Capacity as indicated on drawings, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.

C. Wet Chemical Type: UL-rated Capacity as indicated on drawings, with low “pH” potassium acetate solution in manufacturer's standard enameled-metal container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. When indicated on drawings as “Bracket Mounted Fire Extinguisher”.

B. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.


a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsens Manufacturing Company.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Verticle.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

2. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Install fire extinguisher inside fire extinguisher cabinet as per manufacturer’s recommendations. See Spec section 104413.

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.


Section 105300 - 1 PRE-FAB METAL CANOPIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 105300 PRE-FAB METAL CANOPIES

1.1 General

A. Description of Work

1. Work in this section includes furnishing and installation of extruded aluminum overhead hanger rod style canopies and cantilevered canopies as manufactured by Mapes Industries Inc.

2. Related Items and Considerations

a. Flashing of various designs may be required. Generic flashing supplied by Mapes. Specialty flashing to be supplied by installer.

b. Determine wall construction, make-up and thickness.

c. Ensure adequate wall condition to carry canopy loads where required.

d. Consider water drainage away from canopy where necessary.

e. Any necessary removal or relocation of existing structures, obstructions or materials.

B. Quality Assurance

1. Products meeting these specifications established standard of quality required as manufactured by Mapes Industries, Inc. Lincoln, Nebraska 1-888-273-1132.

C. Field Measurement

1. Confirm dimensions prior to preparation of shop drawings when possible.

2. If requested, supply manufacturer s standard literature and specifications for canopies.

3. Submit shop drawings showing structural component locations/positions, material dimensions and details of construction and assembly.

D. Performance Requirements

1. Canopy must conform to local building codes.

2. PE Stamped calculations are required and must be signed and sealed by an engineer licensed within the state canopy is installed.

E. Deliver, Storage, Handling

1. Deliver and store all canopy components in protected areas.

1.2 Products

A. Manufacturer

1. Mapes Canopies Lincoln, Nebraska Phone: 1-888-273-1132. Fax: 1-877-455-6572.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Product

1. Super Lumideck Hanger Rod Canopy System

2. Super Limideck Cantilever Canopy System

C. Materials

1. Decking shall consist of 3" extruded flat soffit .078 decking.

2. Intermediate framing members shall be extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T6, in profile and thickness shown in current Mapes brochures.

3. Hanger rods and attachment hardware shall be a standard finish.

4. Cantilever supported brackets shall be standard finish.

5. Fascia shall be standard extruded 8" J style.

D. Finishes

1. Finish type shall be 2-Coat Kynar Finish.

E. Fabrication

1. All Mapes Super Lumideck extruded aluminum canopies are shipped with the materials precut to size for field assembly.

2. All connections shall be mechanically assembled utilizing 3/16 fasteners with a minimum shear stress of 350 lb. Pre-welded or factory-welded connections are not acceptable.

3. Decking shall be designed with interlocking roll-formed aluminum members.

4. Concealed drainage. Water shall drain from covered surfaces into intermediate trough and be directed to Downspout From Rear Gutter.

1.3 Execution

A. Inspection

1. Confirm that surrounding area is ready for the canopy installation.

2. Installer shall confirm dimensions and elevations to be as shown on drawings provided by Mapes Industries.

3. Erection shall be performed by an approved installer and scheduled after all concrete, masonry and roofing in the area is completed

B. Installation

1. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's shop drawings. Particular attention should be given to protecting the finish during handling and erection.

C. After installation, entire system shall be left in a clean condition.



Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Section 124813 - 1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 124813

ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roll-up rail mats. 2. Surface-mounted frames.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including door control devices. 2. Divisions between mat sections. 3. Perimeter floor moldings. 4. Custom Graphics: Scale drawing indicating colors.

C. Samples: For each floor mat, tread rail, and frame member.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1.

2.2 ROLL-UP RAIL MATS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Construction Specialties, Inc


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

a. Basis of Design: Pedimat M1 b. Tapered Angle Frame (TNG / 16A051XXX), Where mat system abuts a threshold

provide Aluminum Threshold Frame (THFR / 16A064000) at threshold. c. Tread Insert Options:

1) HD MonoTuft HD 2) L - Logo Option Each entrance mat specifically detailed shall include a logo

or trademark where indicated on drawing.

B. Roll-up, Vinyl-Rail Hinged Mats: Vinyl-acrylic tread rails 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 3/8 inch(9.5 mm) minimum thick, with slotted or perforated hinges.

1. Tread Inserts: 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) high, 28-oz./sq. yd. (950-g/sq. m) weight, level-cut, nylon-pile, fusion-bonded carpet. Carpet shall meet the Carpet and Rug Institute’s standard for indoor air quality. Fibers shall include a minimum of 100, 12 mil monofilament fibers per square inch and colorfast, solution-dyed nylon. Available in one of 25 standard colors as offered by manufacturer. Each carpet fiber and monofilament shall be fusion-bonded to a rigid two-ply backing to prevent fraying and supplied in continuous splice-free lengths. Anti-static carpet fiber shall contain antimicrobial additive and be treated with Scotchgard® to reduce soiling. Carpet weight shall be 33-oz./yd²

2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Inserts: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

3. Rail Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 4. Hinges: Aluminum. 5. Mat Size: As indicated.

2.3 FRAMES

A. Surface-Mounted Frames: Tapered angled aluminum frame or aluminum threshold frame members as indicated on drawings.

1. Tapered angled frame: 1/8” wide edge with flange x 1/2” high.

2. Aluminum threshold frame: Size as per manufactures standard.

3. Aluminum Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.

B. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating.


Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.
